[go: nahoru, domu]

US20060014302A1 - Point of care diagnostic systems - Google Patents

Point of care diagnostic systems Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20060014302A1
US20060014302A1 US11/219,216 US21921605A US2006014302A1 US 20060014302 A1 US20060014302 A1 US 20060014302A1 US 21921605 A US21921605 A US 21921605A US 2006014302 A1 US2006014302 A1 US 2006014302A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
fiberoptic
reader
test
data
test strip
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/219,216
Inventor
Ricardo Martinez
Gail Marzolf
Ronald Pong
Lynn Jones
Robert Hussa
Andrew Senyei
Emory Anderson
Edward Nemec
Jerome Lapointe
Duane DeSieno
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Cytyc Corp
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/017,901 external-priority patent/US6267722B1/en
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Priority to US11/219,216 priority Critical patent/US20060014302A1/en
Assigned to ADEZA BIOMEDICAL CORPORATION reassignment ADEZA BIOMEDICAL CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: PONG, RONALD, JONES, LYNN, DESIENO, DUANE, SENYEI, ANDREW, MARTINEZ, RICARDO R., NEMEC, EDWARD, ANDERSON, EMORY V., LAPOINTE, JEROME P., MARZOLF, GAIL, HUSSA, ROBERT
Publication of US20060014302A1 publication Critical patent/US20060014302A1/en
Assigned to CYTYC CORPORATION reassignment CYTYC CORPORATION MERGER (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ADEZA BIOMEDICAL CORPORATION
Assigned to GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS L.P. reassignment GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS L.P. PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT Assignors: CYTYC CORPORATION
Assigned to GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT reassignment GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT Assignors: CYTYC CORPORATION
Assigned to SUROS SURGICAL SYSTEMS, INC., CYTYC PRENATAL PRODUCTS CORP., HOLOGIC, INC., CYTYC SURGICAL PRODUCTS II LIMITED PARTNERSHIP, R2 TECHNOLOGY, INC., DIRECT RADIOGRAPHY CORP., CYTYC CORPORATION, CYTYC SURGICAL PRODUCTS III, INC., THIRD WAVE TECHNOLOGIES, INC., BIOLUCENT, LLC, CYTYC SURGICAL PRODUCTS LIMITED PARTNERSHIP reassignment SUROS SURGICAL SYSTEMS, INC. TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS Assignors: GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N21/00Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
    • G01N21/17Systems in which incident light is modified in accordance with the properties of the material investigated
    • G01N21/47Scattering, i.e. diffuse reflection
    • G01N21/4738Diffuse reflection, e.g. also for testing fluids, fibrous materials
    • G01N21/474Details of optical heads therefor, e.g. using optical fibres
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N21/00Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
    • G01N21/84Systems specially adapted for particular applications
    • G01N21/8483Investigating reagent band
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/543Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
    • G01N33/54366Apparatus specially adapted for solid-phase testing
    • G01N33/54386Analytical elements
    • G01N33/54387Immunochromatographic test strips
    • G01N33/54388Immunochromatographic test strips based on lateral flow
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G01N33/6887Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids from muscle, cartilage or connective tissue
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G01N33/689Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids related to pregnancy or the gonads
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16HHEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H10/00ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data
    • G16H10/40ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data for data related to laboratory analysis, e.g. patient specimen analysis
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16HHEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H15/00ICT specially adapted for medical reports, e.g. generation or transmission thereof
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16HHEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H30/00ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of medical images
    • G16H30/40ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of medical images for processing medical images, e.g. editing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16HHEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H50/00ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics
    • G16H50/20ICT specially adapted for medical diagnosis, medical simulation or medical data mining; ICT specially adapted for detecting, monitoring or modelling epidemics or pandemics for computer-aided diagnosis, e.g. based on medical expert systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/435Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature from animals; from humans
    • G01N2333/78Connective tissue peptides, e.g. collagen, elastin, laminin, fibronectin, vitronectin, cold insoluble globulin [CIG]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/36Gynecology or obstetrics
    • G01N2800/368Pregnancy complicated by disease or abnormalities of pregnancy, e.g. preeclampsia, preterm labour
    • GPHYSICS
    • G16INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16HHEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
    • G16H10/00ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data
    • G16H10/60ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data for patient-specific data, e.g. for electronic patient records
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02ATECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A90/00Technologies having an indirect contribution to adaptation to climate change
    • Y02A90/10Information and communication technologies [ICT] supporting adaptation to climate change, e.g. for weather forecasting or climate simulation
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S436/00Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing
    • Y10S436/811Test for named disease, body condition or organ function
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S436/00Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing
    • Y10S436/811Test for named disease, body condition or organ function
    • Y10S436/814Pregnancy

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to systems and methods that aid in providing a medical diagnosis or risk assessment for a patient using biochemical and historic patient data, including data from point of care diagnostic tests or assays, and processing the information to give an indication of a medical condition or risk.
  • results are generally detected visually by human eye.
  • results are generally detected visually by human eye.
  • human perception and judgment involved there is significant variance among those interpreting such test results as to whether a color change or other measurable signal has occurred, and the degree of such occurrence.
  • subjectivity involved in interpreting whether immunoassay results are positive or negative This is particularly pronounced where the result is close to a threshold value.
  • the variance is further enhanced when attempts are made to quantitate such assay test results. Accurate results may be critical for certain diagnostic assays.
  • fFN fetal fibronectin
  • Systems and methods for medical diagnosis or risk assessment for a patient are provided. These systems and methods are designed to be employed at the point of care, such as in emergency rooms, operating rooms, hospital laboratories and other clinical laboratories, doctor's offices, in the field, or in any situation in which a rapid and accurate result is desired.
  • the systems and methods process patient data, particularly data from point of care diagnostic tests or assays, including immunoassays, chemical assays, nucleic acid assays, calorimetric assays, fluorometric assays, chemiluminescent and bioluminescent assays, electrocardiograms, X-rays and other such tests, and provide an indication of a medical condition or risk or absence thereof.
  • the systems include an instrument for reading or evaluating the test data and software for converting the data into diagnostic or risk assessment information.
  • the systems include a test device, such as a test strip, optionally encased in a housing, for analyzing patient samples and obtaining patient data.
  • the device includes a symbology, such as a bar code, which is used to associate identifying information, such as intensity value, standard curves, patient information, reagent information and other such information, with the test device.
  • the reader in the system is optionally adapted to read the symbology.
  • the systems optionally include a decision-support system or systems, such as a neural network, for evaluating the digitized data, and also for subsequent assessment of the data, such as by integration with other patient information, including documents and information in medical records.
  • a decision-support system or systems such as a neural network
  • All software and instrument components are preferably included in a single package.
  • the software can be contained in a remote computer so that the test data obtained at a point of care can be sent electronically to a processing center for evaluation.
  • the systems operate on site at the point of care, such as in a doctor's office, or remote therefrom.
  • the patient information includes data from physical and biochemical tests, such as immunoassays, and from other procedures.
  • the test is performed on a patient at the point of care and generates data that can be digitized, such as by an electronic reflectance or transmission reader, which generates a data signal.
  • the signal is processed using software employing data reduction and curve fitting algorithms, or a decision support system, such as a trained neural network, or combinations thereof, for converting the signal into data, which is used to aid in diagnosis of a medical condition or determination of a risk of disease.
  • a second decision support system such as a neural net, for refinement or enhancement of the assessment.
  • systems and methods for detecting and measuring levels of a target analyte in a patient sample, analyzing the resulting data, and providing a diagnosis or risk assessment include an assay device in combination with a reader, particularly a computer-assisted reader, preferably a reflectance reader, and data processing software employing data reduction and curve fitting algorithms, optionally in combination with a trained neural network for accurately determining the presence or concentration of analyte in a biological sample.
  • the methods include the steps of performing an assay on a patient sample, reading the data using a reflectance reader and processing the reflectance data using data processing software employing data reduction algorithms.
  • the assay is an immunoassay.
  • Preferred software includes curve fitting algorithms, optionally in combination with a trained neural network, to determine the presence or amount of analyte in a given sample.
  • the data obtained from the reader then can be further processed by the medical diagnosis system to provide a risk assessment or diagnosis of a medical condition as output.
  • the output can be used as input into a subsequent decision support system, such as a neural network, that is trained to evaluate such data.
  • the assay device is a lateral flow test strip, preferably, though not necessarily, encased in a housing, designed to be read by the reader, and the assay is a sandwich immunoassay.
  • a patient sample is contacted with an antibody for a selected target analyte indicative of a disease, disorder or risk thereof.
  • the antibody is preferably labeled by conjugation to a physically detectable label, and upon contacting with the sample containing the target analyte forms a complex.
  • the antibody-analyte complex is then contacted with a second antibody for the antigen, which is immobilized on a solid support.
  • the second antibody captures the antibody-analyte complex to form an antibody-analyte-antibody sandwich complex, and the resulting complex, which is immobilized on the solid support, is detectable by virtue of the label.
  • the test strip is then inserted into a reader, where the signal from the label in the complex is measured.
  • the test strip could be inserted into the reader prior to addition of the sample.
  • the housing may include a symbology, such as a bar code, which also is read by the reader and contains data related to the assay device and/or test run.
  • the signal obtained is processed using data processing software employing data reduction and curve fitting algorithms, optionally in combination with a trained neural network, to give either a positive or negative result, or a quantitative determination of the concentration of analyte in the sample, which is correlated with a result indicative of a risk or presence of a disease or disorder.
  • This result can optionally be input into a decision support system, and processed to provide an enhanced assessment of the risk of a medical condition as output.
  • the entire procedure may be automated and/or computer-controlled.
  • the reflectance reader is adapted to read a symbology on the test device.
  • the symbology is preferably a bar code, which can be read in the same manner that the test strip in the device can be read.
  • the reader head scans across a bar code in a stepwise fashion.
  • the data collected from the bar code is transformed into integrated peak information and analyzed as alphanumeric characters, which are related to information related to the particular device and/or test run or other information, including patient information.
  • Any bar code from among the many known in the industry can be employed.
  • Code 39 (a trademark of Interface Mechanism, Inc., Lynnwood, Wash.; see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,379,224, U.S. Pat. No. 4,438,327, U.S. Pat. No. 4,511,259 or Code 128 bar codes (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,227,893) are used.
  • the analyte to be detected is fetal fibronectin (fFN) and the result obtained is a positive or negative indication of pregnancy or the risk of certain pregnancy-related conditions or fertility and infertility-related conditions, including ectopic pregnancy, preterm labor, pre-eclampsia, imminent delivery, term induction and fetal membrane rupture.
  • fFN fetal fibronectin
  • a rapid fFN test using a lateral flow test device provides the same clinically relevant information as a fFN ELISA (an enzyme linked immunosorbent sandwich assay (ELISA)) test heretofore available in significantly less time and at the point of care.
  • a fFN ELISA an enzyme linked immunosorbent sandwich assay (ELISA) test heretofore available in significantly less time and at the point of care.
  • the fFN immunoassay provided herein allows the user to test a cervicovaginal swab sample in about 20 minutes.
  • additional information such as a more accurate risk assessment or
  • the system herein provides a means to detect and to quantitate concentrations of fFN throughout pregnancy and to assess the risk and detect conditions associated therewith. Because of the sensitivity of the combination of the reader and devices provided herein, fFN may be monitored throughout pregnancy, including times when it is not detected by less sensitive systems.
  • the reflectance reader and test strip device also are provided herein. Also provided herein are the neural nets for assessing the data.
  • a method for classifying an image also is provided.
  • the method includes the steps of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters from which the image can be reconstructed within a predetermined degree of tolerance; inputting the derived parameters into a classification neural network; and determining the classification of the image based on the output of the classification neural network.
  • the method of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters is achieved by defining a mathematical function that contains a plurality of parameters representative of the image; and optimizing the parameters of the function using a methodology that minimizes the error between the image and a reconstruction of the image using the function.
  • the method of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters is achieved by inputting the image into a trained neural network, where the inputs to the network represent the image, the hidden layer of the network is such that the number of hidden elements is smaller than the number of inputs to the network, and the outputs of the network represent reconstruction of the image; and setting the derived parameters to the output values of the trained neural network.
  • the method of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters is achieved by defining a neural network in which the inputs to the network are the coordinates of a point in the image, the hidden layer contains a plurality of elements, and the output of the network represents the reconstruction of the associated point in the image; training the neural network so that the error between the network output and the image are minimized for all points in the image; and setting the derived parameters to the weights of the hidden layer of the trained neural network.
  • the neural networks and computer systems used in the methods also are provided.
  • FIG. 1A is a top view of an assay test strip, such as an immunoassay test strip;
  • FIG. 1B is a side view of the assay test strip of FIG. 1 ;
  • FIG. 2A is a perspective view of an assay device, including the assay test strip of FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B and housing assembly and showing a bar code, which can optionally be affixed to the housing;
  • FIG. 2B is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an assay device, including the assay test strip of FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B and housing assembly and showing a bar code, which can optionally be affixed to the housing;
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the assay device of FIG. 2B showing the individual components of the device;
  • FIG. 4 is a top view of an exemplary housing assembly for the assay test strip of FIG. 1 ;
  • FIG. 5 is a side assembly view of the housing assembly of FIG. 4 ;
  • FIG. 6 is a top view of an embodiment of an assay reader and an assay device, inserted therein, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the reader;
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of portion of the assay device of FIG. 2A shown inserted into a cassette slot of a lower housing and extending to a reader head assembly within an exemplary embodiment of an assay reader;
  • FIG. 8 is a top view of the lower housing of the assay reader of FIG. 7 with the assay device inserted therein and a stepper motor shown positioned relative to the assay device as is when the assay device is fully inserted into the cassette slot of the reader;
  • FIG. 9 is a side view of the lower housing of the reader device of FIG. 7 with the assay device of FIG. 2A fully inserted with the stepper motor shown positioned relative to the fully inserted assay device, with a reader head shown positioned in a lowered position over a test opening of the assay device, and with a carriage wheel shown engaged by the assay device so as to lower the reader head into its lowered position therein;
  • FIG. 10 is a side view of a reader head assembly such as is found in the reader device of FIG. 6 ;
  • FIG. 11 is a side view of a reader head of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10 ;
  • FIG. 12 is a reverse angle side view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10 ;
  • FIG. 13 is a reverse angle side view of the reader head of FIG. 11 ;
  • FIG. 14 is a side view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10 , having been actuated so as to pivot the reader head assembly into a raised position suitable for insertion and removal of the assay device into and from the reader head assembly within the assay reader;
  • FIG. 15 is an end view of the reader head of FIG. 11 ;
  • FIG. 16 is an end view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10 ;
  • FIG. 17 is a cut-away view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 11 with first and second light emitting diodes, a photodetector, corresponding fiberoptic bundles and an aperture at a lower end thereof depicted;
  • FIG. 18 is a partial closeup cross-sectional view of a reader head tip of the reader head of FIG. 17 showing the aperture and ends of fiberoptic fibers of the fiberoptic bundles of FIG. 17 ;
  • FIG. 19 is a closeup bottom view of the aperture of the reader head of FIGS. 17 and 18 illustrating a sigmoidal pattern for positioning individual fiberoptic fibers (fiberoptic conductors);
  • FIG. 20 is a closeup end view of the corresponding fiberoptic bundle at the first light emitting diode of FIG. 17 from which the fiberoptic bundle conducts light from the first light emitting diode;
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram illustrating a process by which an assay test strip is analyzed so as to determine an amount of background light at a control region of the assay test strip;
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram illustrating a process by which an assay test strip is analyzed so as to determine an amount of reflection resulting from a first illumination of a control portion of the assay test strip;
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic view diagram illustrating a process by which an assay test strip is analyzed so as to determine an amount of reflection resulting from a second illumination of a control portion of the assay test strip;
  • FIG. 24 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of the reader that is adapted for reading a bar code.
  • FIG. 25 is an example of a bar code in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the assay device.
  • point of care testing refers to real time diagnostic testing that can be done in a rapid time frame so that the resulting test is performed faster than comparable tests that do not employ this system.
  • the exemplified fFN immunoassay is performed in less time than the fFN ELISA assay (i.e., less than about 3 to 4 hours, preferably less than 1 hour, more preferably less than half an hour).
  • it can be performed rapidly and on site, such as in a doctor's office, at a bedside, in a stat laboratory, emergency room or other such locales, particularly where rapid and accurate results are required. The patient can be present, but such presence is not required.
  • Point of care includes, but is not limited to: emergency rooms, operating rooms, hospital laboratories and other clinical laboratories, doctor's offices, in the field, or in any situation in which a rapid and accurate result is desired.
  • an anti-fFN antibody is an antibody that binds selectively with fFN. Such antibodies are known to those of skill in the art and also may be readily isolated.
  • a test strip refers to any means on which patient test data or other data is generated, recorded or displayed in a manner that forms an image or from which an image can be generated.
  • Such strips include, but are not limited to, immunochromatographic test strips, such as lateral flow devices, X-ray films, such as X-rays and films produced from sequencing gels, EKG printouts, MRI results and other such means that generate or from which an image as defined herein can be generated.
  • the strip is preferably adapted for scanning or reading by a reader, preferably the reader provided herein. Although referred to as a “strip,” it can be of any shape or geometry, including rectangular, three dimensional, circular, and so forth.
  • a sigmoidal pattern (also referred to herein as sigmoidal-like; see, e.g., FIG. 19 ) with reference to the fiberoptics refers to the S-shaped or snake-like pattern of illumination selected for maximizing illumination across the lines on the test strip.
  • the pattern is not strictly a sigmoidal shape, but refers to a pattern such as that depicted in FIG. 19 , which pattern provides a means for adding more area to any reading. Any other pattern that achieved this result is encompassed within this expression.
  • fetal restricted antigens refers to antigen that are present in pregnant women uniquely, or in substantially elevated amounts compared to non-pregnant women in maternal serum, plasma, urine, saliva, sweat, tears and other bodily fluids.
  • fetal fibronectin is a fetal restricted antigen found in placenta, amniotic fluid and fetal connective tissue. It differs structurally from adult fibronectins. Fetal fibronectin is not present in significant quantities in maternal plasma or serum. Fetal fibronectin may be captured with a general binding antibody, such as an anti-fibronectin antibody, or an anti-fetal restricted antigen antibody, such as anti-fetal fibronectin antibody.
  • an immunoassay is defined as any method using a preferential binding of an antigen with a second material, a binding partner, usually an antibody or another substance having an antigen binding site, which binds preferentially with an epitope of the fetal restricted antigen.
  • Preferential binding refers to binding between binding partners that is selective and generally specific, and demonstrates less than 10%, preferably less than 5%, cross-reactive nonspecific binding.
  • the immunoassay methods provided herein include any known to those of skill in the art, including, but not limited to, sandwich, competition, agglutination or precipitation, for example.
  • a solid support refers to the material to which the antibody is linked.
  • the support materials include any material that can act as a support for attachment of the molecules of interest. Such materials are known to those of skill in this art.
  • These materials include, but are not limited to, organic or inorganic polymers, natural and synthetic polymers, including, but not limited to, agarose, cellulose, nitrocellulose, cellulose acetate, other cellulose derivatives, dextran, dextran-derivatives and dextran copolymers, other polysaccharides, glass, silica gels, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, rayon, nylon, polyethylene, polypropylene, polybutlyene, polycarbonate, polyesters, polyamides, vinyl polymers, polyvinylalcohols, polystyrene and polystyrene copolymers, polystyrene cross-linked with divinylbenzene or the like, acrylic resins, acrylates and acrylic acids, acrylamides, polyacrylamides, polyacrylamide blends, copolymers of vinyl and acrylamide, methacrylates, methacrylate derivatives and copolymers, other polymers and co-polymers with various functional groups, late
  • a reader refers to an instrument for detecting and/or quantitating data, such as on test strips.
  • the data may be visible to the naked eye, but does not need to be visible.
  • a reflectance reader refers to an instrument adapted to read a test strip using reflected light, including fluorescence, or electromagnetic radiation of any wavelength. Reflectance can be detected using a photodetector or other detector, such as charge coupled diodes (CCD).
  • CCD charge coupled diodes
  • a preferred reflectance reader which is provided and described herein, includes a cassette slot adapted to receive a test-strip, light-emitting diodes, optical fibers, a sensing head, including means for positioning the sensing head along the test strip, a control circuit to read the photodetector output and control the on and off operation of the light-emitting diodes, a memory circuit for storing raw and/or processed data, and a photodetector, such as a silicon photodiode detector.
  • a sensing head refers to the assembly which is adapted to read a test strip using reflected light or other electromagnetic radiation.
  • the sensing head in the reader refers to the part of the sensing head assembly that randomizes the optical bundles and arranges the fibers in the plane normal to the test strip.
  • color refers to the relative energy distribution of electromagnetic radiation within the visible spectrum. Color can be assessed visually or by using equipment, such as a photosensitive detector.
  • a color change refers to a change in intensity or hue of color or may be the appearance of color where no color existed or the disappearance of color.
  • a decision-support system also referred to as a “data mining system” or a “knowledge discovery in data system” is any system, typically a computer-based system, that can be trained on data to classify the input data and then subsequently used with new input data to make decisions based on the training data.
  • data mining system or a “knowledge discovery in data system”
  • knowledge discovery in data system is any system, typically a computer-based system, that can be trained on data to classify the input data and then subsequently used with new input data to make decisions based on the training data.
  • These systems include, but are not limited, expert systems, fuzzy logic, non-linear regression analysis, multivariate analysis, decision tree classifiers, Bayesian belief networks and, as exemplified herein, neural networks.
  • an adaptive machine learning process refers to any system whereby data are used to generate a predictive solution. Such processes include those effected by expert systems, neural networks, and fuzzy logic.
  • an expert system is a computer-based problem solving and decision-support system based on knowledge of its task and logical rules or procedures for using the knowledge.
  • the knowledge and the logic are entered into the computer from the experience of human specialists in the area of expertise.
  • a neural network is a parallel computational model comprised of densely interconnected adaptive processing elements.
  • the processing elements are configured into an input layer, an output layer and at least one hidden layer.
  • Suitable neural networks are known to those of skill in this art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • a processing element which also may be known as a perceptron or an artificial neuron, is a computational unit which maps input data from a plurality of inputs into a single binary output in accordance with a transfer function.
  • Each processing element has an input weight corresponding to each input which is multiplied with the signal received at that input to produce a weighted input value.
  • the processing element sums the weighted inputs values of each of the inputs to generate a weighted sum which is then compared to the threshold defined by the transfer function.
  • a transfer function also known as a threshold function or an activation function, is a mathematical function which creates a curve defining two distinct categories. Transfer functions may be linear, but, as used in neural networks, are more typically non-linear, including quadratic, polynomial, or sigmoid functions.
  • an image is a multi-dimensional array of data points, where each data point is represented by a number, or a set of numbers, and where there is a relationship between adjacent points in each of the dimensions.
  • the index values in each dimension typically represent a linear relationship, like position or time, but are not limited to these types of relationships.
  • a single digitized scan line from a TV frame would be considered a two dimensional image.
  • an image refers to a one-dimensional set of pixels, which encode the intensity of the color on the test strip.
  • classifying an image refers to associating an object or state with the image. Images of fruit might be classified as to the type of fruit shown in the image. In the case of the preferred embodiment, classifying the test strip image refers to associating the positive or negative state with the image.
  • reconstructing an image refers to producing an image from a mathematical function.
  • an image is represented by a mathematical function, there may be errors in the representation due to any number of factors.
  • backpropagation also known as backprop
  • backprop is a training method for neural networks for correcting errors between the target output and the actual output.
  • the error signal is fed back through the processing layer of the neural network, causing changes in the weights of the processing elements to bring the actual output closer to the target output.
  • diagnosis refers to a predictive process in which the presence, absence, severity or course of treatment of a disease, disorder or other medical condition is assessed.
  • diagnosis will also include predictive processes for determining the outcome resulting from a treatment.
  • risk refers to a predictive process in which the probability of a particular outcome is assessed.
  • a patient or subject includes any mammals for whom diagnosis is contemplated. Humans are the preferred subjects.
  • biochemical test data refers to data from any analytical methods, which include, but are not limited to: immunoassays, bioassays, including nucleic acid and protein based assays, chromatography, data from monitors, and imagers; measurements and also includes data related to vital signs and body function, such as pulse rate, temperature, blood pressure, data generated by, for example, EKG, ECG and EEG, biorhythm monitors and other such information.
  • the analysis can assess for example, chemical analytes, serum markers, antibodies, protein, nucleic acids and other such material obtained from the patient through a sample.
  • Immunoassays are exemplified herein, but such exemplification is not intended to limit the intended scope of the disclosure, which is applicable to any test strip and test data read by an instrument, particularly a reflectance reader.
  • patient historical data refers to data obtained from a patient, such as by questionnaire format, but typically does not include biochemical test data as used herein, except to the extent such data is historical, a desired solution is one that generates a number or result whereby a diagnosis of a disorder can be generated.
  • a run is defined as a group of tests that include a at least one of a positive reference, positive control, negative control and any number of clinical samples within a 24 hr. period.
  • symbology refers to a code, such as a bar code, that is engraved or imprinted on the test device.
  • the symbology is any code known or designed by the user.
  • the symbols are associated with information stored in a remote computer or memory or other such device or means.
  • each test device can be uniquely identified with an encoded symbology. It is contemplated herein that identifying and other information can be encoded in the bar code, which can be read by the reader when the test strip is read. Alternatively, the bar code or other symbology may be read by any of reading device known to those of skill in the art.
  • a bar code is a symbology, typically a field of alternating dark bars and reflective spaces of varying widths, that is affixed onto or associated with an item and provides identifying information about the item.
  • Bar codes can placed on a reflective background, and the contrast between the dark bars and reflective spaces, or the reflectivity ratio, allows an optical sensor in a reader to discern the transitions between the bars and spaces in the symbol.
  • Bar codes are electro-optically scanned, typically using a laser or LED, and generate a signal that is transmitted to an associated computer whose memory has digitally stored therein identifying information associated with the item. The item is thereby automatically identified by its bar code and can be tracked, or additional information can be added to the stored information associated with the encoded item.
  • bar code formats are available and are used for different purposes.
  • UPC/EAN codes Code 39, Code 128, Codeabar, Interleaved 2 of 5 and many others; two-dimensional codes, such as PDF 417, Code 49, Code 16K; matrix codes (Data Code, Code 1, Vericod); graphic codes; and any others known to those of skill in the art.
  • Preferred herein are one-dimensional codes, such as the well known Code 39 and Code 128, although two-dimensional codes (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,243,655 and 5,304,786, also are suitable for use herein.
  • the 39 bar code was developed in 1974 to provide a fully alphanumeric bar code for data entry systems. This bar code is especially effective in applications that use alphanumeric data for item identification.
  • the structure of 39 permits it to be printed by a wide variety of techniques, including offset, letterpress, fully-formed impact printers, dot matrix printers, and on-impact printing devices.
  • Code 39 is the most widely used alphanumeric bar code. It has been accepted as a standard code by many companies and industries. Specification ANSI Draft MH10.X-1981, entitled, “Specifications for Bar Code Symbols on Transport Packages & Unit Loads,” describes three different bar code symbologies. Code 39 is called 3-of-9 code in the ANSI specification. Moreover, the Depae MIL-STD-1189, dated Jan. 4, 1982, defines 39 (called 3 of 9 code) as the standard symbology for marking unit packs, outer containers, and selected documents.
  • Code 39 includes 9 bits, at least three of which are always 1.
  • Code 39 can be used to encode a set of 43 characters, including upper case alphabetic and numeric (0-9) characters, as well as seven special characters ( ⁇ , ., , *, $, /, + and %).
  • the beginning and end characters are always an asterisk (*).
  • the code uses narrow and wide bars along with narrow and wide spaces, and the encoding for a single character is made up of a pattern of bars and spaces.
  • the code structure is three wide elements out of a total of nine elements, where an element is the area occupied by a bar or space). The nine elements include five bars and four spaces.
  • Code 1208 every character is constructed of eleven bars and spaces, and all 128 ASCII characters, i.e., numeric characters, upper and lower case characters, punctuation and control codes are encoded. There are three different character sets to select from: one set encodes all upper case characters and all ASCII control characters; another encodes all upper and lower case characters; and the third encodes all numeric characters. Through the use of special characters, it is possible to switch between character sets within a single code symbol.
  • Code 128 uses four different bar and space widths. Each data character encoded in a Code 128 symbol is made up of 11 black or white modules. Three bars and three spaces are formed out of the 11 modules. There are 106 different three bar/three space combinations. Bars and spaces can vary between one and four modules wide.
  • the stop character is made up of 13 modules.
  • the symbol includes a quiet zone (10 ⁇ -dimensions), a start character, the encoded data, a check character, the stop character and a trailing quiet zone (10 ⁇ -dimensions) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,625).
  • the systems are designed for use on site at the point of care, where patients are examined and tested, and for operation remote from the site.
  • the systems are designed to accept input in the form of patient data, including, but not limited to biochemical test data, physical test data, historical data and other such data, and to process and output information, preferably data relating to a medical diagnosis or a disease risk indicator.
  • patient data may be contained within the system, such as medical records or history, or may be input as a signal or image from a medical test or procedure, for example, immunoassay test data, blood pressure reading, ultrasound, X-ray or MRI, or introduced in any other form.
  • Specific test data can be digitized, processed and input into the medical diagnosis expert system, where it may be integrated with other patient information.
  • the output from the system is a disease risk index or medical diagnosis.
  • the system includes a reader, such as a reflectance or transmission reader, preferably a reflectance reader, for reading patient data, a test device designed to be read in the reader, and software for analysis of the data.
  • a reader such as a reflectance or transmission reader, preferably a reflectance reader
  • the reader is the reflectance reader provided herein.
  • a test strip device in a plastic housing designed for use with the reader, optionally including a symbology, such as an alphanumeric character bar code or other machine-readable code, and software designed for analysis of the data generated from the test strip also are provided.
  • any assay is intended for use in the systems and methods herein.
  • Such assays include, but are not limited to: nucleic acid detection, including using amplification and non-amplification protocols, any assay that relies on colorimetric or spectrometric detection, including fluorometric, luminescent detection, such as creatine, hemoglobin, lipids, ionic assays, blood chemistry.
  • Any test that produces a signal, or from which a signal can be generated, that can be detected by a detector, such as a photodetector or a gamma counter, is intended for use as part of the systems provided herein. Any wavelength is intended to be included.
  • Immunoassays including competitive and non-competitive immunoassays, are among those preferred for determination of the presence or amount of analyte in a patient sample, and are exemplified herein. It is understood that immunoassays are provided for exemplification, and that the methods and systems provided herein have broad applicability to patient test data and other test data.
  • Immunoassays may be homogeneous, i.e. performed in a single phase, or heterogeneous, where antigen or antibody is linked to an insoluble solid support upon which the assay is performed. Sandwich or competitive assays may be performed. The reaction steps may be performed simultaneously or sequentially. Threshold assays may be performed, where a predetermined amount of analyte is removed from the sample using a capture reagent before the assay is performed, and only analyte levels of above the specified concentration are detected. Assay formats include, but are not limited to, for example, assays performed in test tubes, wells or on immunochromatographic test strips, as well as dipstick, lateral flow or migratory format immunoassays.
  • Any known immunoassay procedure particularly those that can be adapted for use in combination with lateral flow devices as described herein, can be used in the systems and methods provided herein.
  • test strips Any device which is compatible for use with a reader, preferably a reflectance reader, for determining the assay result is contemplated for use herein. Any such test strips that can be adapted for use in combination with a reader are contemplated for use in the systems provided herein.
  • test strip devices as are known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,658,801, 5,656,502, 5,591,645, 5,500,375, 5,252,459, 5,132,097 and many other examples) may be used in systems as described herein, particularly in combination with the reader provided herein.
  • test devices are intended for use with biological samples, such as saliva, blood, serum, cerebral spinal fluid, cervico-vaginal samples, for example.
  • biological samples such as saliva, blood, serum, cerebral spinal fluid, cervico-vaginal samples, for example.
  • Other biological samples such as food samples, which are tested for contamination, such as by bacteria or insects, also are contemplated.
  • Target analytes include, but are not limited to: nucleic acids, proteins, peptides, such as human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) antigens, antigens indicative of bacterial, such as Salmonella and E.
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • coli coli , yeast or parasitic infections, apolipoprotein(a) and lipoprotein(a), environmental antigens, human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), E-3-G, interleukins and other cytokines and immunomodulatory proteins, such as IL-6 and interferon, small nuclear ribonuclear particles (snRNP) antigens, fFN and other indicators, such as IGF binding protein-1, of pregnancy related disorders.
  • hCG human chorionic gonadotropin
  • E-3-G interleukins and other cytokines and immunomodulatory proteins, such as IL-6 and interferon
  • IL-6 and interferon interleukins and other cytokines and immunomodulatory proteins
  • snRNP small nuclear ribonuclear particles
  • fFN small nuclear ribonuclear particles
  • a preferred embodiment is an immunoassay test strip that includes a membrane system that defines a liquid flow pathway.
  • An exemplary immunoassay test strip provided herein is shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B .
  • the test strip is described in detail in EXAMPLE 1. This test strip is provided for purposes of exemplification of the methods and systems provided herein and is not intended to limit the application to immunoassay test strip devices.
  • lateral flow test immunoassay devices are among those preferred herein.
  • a membrane system forms a single fluid flow pathway along the test strip.
  • the membrane system includes components that act as a solid support for immunoreactions.
  • porous or bibulous or absorbent materials may be placed on a strip such that they partially overlap, or a single material can be used, in order to conduct liquid along the strip.
  • the membrane materials may be supported on a backing, such as a plastic backing.
  • the test strip includes a glass fiber pad, a nitrocellulose strip and an absorbent cellulose paper strip supported on a plastic backing.
  • Antibodies that react with the target analyte and/or a detectable label system are immobilized on the solid support.
  • the antibodies may be bound to the test strip by adsorption, ionic binding, van der Waals adsorption, electrostatic binding, or by covalent binding, by using a coupling agent, such as glutaraldehyde.
  • the antibodies may be applied to the conjugate pad and nitrocellulose strip using standard dispensing methods, such as a syringe pump, air brush, ceramic piston pump or drop-on-demand dispenser.
  • a volumetric ceramic piston pump dispenser is used to stripe antibodies that bind the analyte of interest, including a labeled antibody conjugate, onto a glass fiber conjugate pad and a nitrocellulose strip.
  • the test strip may or may not be otherwise treated, for example, with sugar to facilitate mobility along the test strip or with water-soluble non-immune animal proteins, such as albumins, including bovine (BSA), other animal proteins, water-soluble polyamino acids, or casein to block non-specific binding sites.
  • water-soluble non-immune animal proteins such as albumins, including bovine (BSA), other animal proteins, water-soluble polyamino acids, or casein to block non-specific binding sites.
  • the test strip optionally may be contained within a housing for insertion into the reflectance reader.
  • the housing may be made of plastic or other inert material that does not interfere with the assay procedure.
  • An exemplary assay device, including a test strip and housing assembly is shown in FIGS. 2A-5 .
  • the test strip housing includes a symbology, such as a bar code that can be associated with data related to the assay device, patient data and/or test run.
  • a symbology such as a bar code that can be associated with data related to the assay device, patient data and/or test run.
  • information associated with the device such as lot number, expiration date, analyte and intensity value, or information related to the test run, such as date, reflectance value or other such information, can be encoded and associated, such as in a database with a bar code imprinted on the device. Any bar code system that provides the appropriate line thickness and spacing can be used. Code 39 and Code 128 are among the preferred bar code systems.
  • Code 39 is used.
  • An example bar code is shown in FIG. 25 .
  • the bar code is made up of 11 alphanumerics, including 2 alphabetic and 9 numeric characters.
  • the first and last characters are asterisks (*), as is standard in the Code 39 system.
  • the lot number is stored as 1 alpha and 4 numeric codes so that product complaints or questions can be traced to a particular lot number.
  • the first character represents the month of production
  • the second is a digit representing the year of production
  • the last three are an index value indicating the lot number.
  • the lot number “A8001” represents the first device in a lot produced in January, 1998.
  • next two characters represent the identity of the analyte as 2 numerics (00-99). This permits the use of up to 100 different analytes with the system.
  • the reflectance intensity value (00-99) is stored as the next two numeric characters (“01”).
  • the intensity value sets the reference threshold for which controls and patient samples can be compared. This eliminates the need to run liquid reference samples on a daily basis.
  • FIGS. 2A, 2B and 3 depict assay devices that optionally include bar codes, 216 and 316 , respectively.
  • the cassette expiration date is stored as 1 alpha and 1 numeric code to prevent the use of expired devices. In the example given, an expiration code of “A9” represents an expiration date of January, 1999.
  • any antibody including polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies, or any fragment thereof, such as the Fab fragment, that binds the analyte of interest, is contemplated for use herein.
  • Monoclonal and/or polyclonal antibodies may be used.
  • a mouse monoclonal anti-fetal fibronectin antibody may be used in a labeled antibody-conjugate for detecting fetal fibronectin
  • a polyclonal goat anti-mouse antibody also may be used to bind fetal fibronectin to form a sandwich complex.
  • An antibody that binds to the labeled antibody conjugate that is not complexed with fetal fibronectin may be immobilized on the test strip and used as a control antibody.
  • a polyclonal goat anti-mouse IgG antibody may be used.
  • An antibody conjugate containing a detectable label may be used to bind the analyte of interest.
  • the detectable label used in the antibody conjugate may be any physical or chemical label capable of being detected on a solid support using a reader, preferably a reflectance reader, and capable of being used to distinguish the reagents to be detected from other compounds and materials in the assay.
  • Suitable antibody labels are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • the labels include, but are not limited to enzyme-substrate combinations that produce color upon reaction, colored particles, such as latex particles, colloidal metal or metal or carbon sol labels, fluorescent labels, and liposome or polymer sacs, which are detected due to aggregation of the label.
  • a preferred label is a colored latex particle.
  • colloidal gold is used in the labeled antibody conjugate.
  • the label may be derivatized for linking antibodies, such as by attaching functional groups, such as carboxyl groups to the surface of a particle to permit covalent attachment of antibodies.
  • Antibodies may be conjugated to the label using well known coupling methods. Coupling agents such as glutaraldehyde or carbodiimide may be used.
  • the labels may be bonded or coupled to the antibodies by chemical or physical bonding.
  • a carbodiimide coupling reagent, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDAC) is used to link antibodies to latex particles.
  • any analyte that can be detected in any assay, particularly calorimetric assays, including immunoassays, and that can be associated with a disorder is contemplated as a target herein.
  • Suitable analytes are any which can be used, along with a specific binding partner, such as an antibody, or a competitor, such as an analog, in an assay.
  • Analytes may include, but are not limited to proteins, haptens, immunoglobulins, enzymes, hormones (e.g., hCG, LH, E-3-G estrone-3-glucuronide and P-3-G (progestrone-3-glucuronide)), polynucleotides, steroids, lipoproteins, drugs, bacterial or viral antigens, such as Streptococcus, Neisseria and Chlamydia , lymphokines, cytokines, and the like.
  • hormones e.g., hCG, LH, E-3-G estrone-3-glucuronide and P-3-G (progestrone-3-glucuronide)
  • polynucleotides e.g., steroids, lipoproteins, drugs, bacterial or viral antigens, such as Streptococcus, Neisseria and Chlamydia , lymphokines, cytokines, and the like.
  • steroids e.g
  • fetal fibronectin in cervicovaginal samples, the systems and methods provided herein are not limited to the detection and measurement of fetal fibronectin, but apply to any biochemical test, particularly those for which test strips can be developed or for which test strips are known.
  • the system is used for diagnosing or predicting conditions such as pregnancy, including ectopic pregnancy, pre-eclampsia, preterm labor or imminent delivery and fetal membrane rupture.
  • Fetal fibronectin is a fetal restricted antigen found in placenta, amniotic fluid and fetal connective tissue. Since fetal fibronectin is strictly associated with pregnancy, determination of the presence of fetal fibronectin in a cervicovaginal sample is a highly reliable early indication of pregnancy. Also, the absence of a fetal restricted antigen in a cervicovaginal sample during the first 20 weeks of pregnancy is an indicator of ectopic pregnancy.
  • Ectopic pregnancies which are a major cause of mortality for women, are not readily distinguished from normal pregnancies using standard pregnancy determination methods and tests. Determination of impending preterm births is critical for increasing neonatal survival of preterm infants.
  • the presence of fetal fibronectin (fFN) in cervicovaginal secretion samples in patients after week 12 of pregnancy is associated with a risk of impending delivery, including spontaneous abortions (12-20 weeks), preterm delivery (20-37 weeks), term (37-40 weeks) and post-date delivery (after 40 weeks), in pregnant women.
  • fetal fibronectin in a cervicovaginal sample provides a method for determining increased risk of labor and fetal membrane rupture after week 20 of pregnancy.
  • Detection of rupture of the amniotic membrane is important in distinguishing true and false labor, and when the rupture is small and the volume of amniotic liquid escaping is small, the rupture is often undetected.
  • the methods and systems herein provide a means to reliably assess the risk for any of these conditions.
  • An immunoassay procedure for detecting fetal fibronectin is described in EXAMPLE 2.
  • An antibody that will bind the analyte of interest is conjugated to a detectable label.
  • a mouse monoclonal anti-fFN antibody (see, U.S. Pat. No. 5,281,522), conjugated to latex particles containing a blue dye may be used.
  • a goat polyclonal antibody to human fibronectin is conjugated to a colloidal gold label.
  • an antibody that binds the labeled antibody conjugate that is not complexed with fetal fibronectin is used as a control antibody.
  • the labeled conjugate includes a monoclonal anti-fetal fibronectin antibody
  • a polyclonal goat anti-mouse IgG antibody is used.
  • the antibodies may be raised and purified using methods known to those of skill in the art or obtained from publicly available sources.
  • monoclonal antibody FDC-6 deposited at the American Type Culture Collection as accession number ATCC HB 9018; see U.S. Pat. No. 4,894,326; see, also, Matsuura et al. (1985) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82:6517-6521; see, also, U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • a patient sample is obtained.
  • the sample may include fluid and particulate solids, and, thus, can be filtered prior to application to the assay test strip.
  • the sample may be removed from the patient using a swab having a fibrous tip, an aspirator, suction or lavage device, syringe, or any other known method of removing a bodily sample, including passive methods for collecting urine or saliva.
  • the sample may be extracted into a buffer solution, and optionally heated, for example, at 37° C. and filtered.
  • the sample is obtained from in the vicinity of the posterior formix, the ectocervix or external cervical os using a swab having a dacron or other fibrous tip.
  • a volume of the test sample is then delivered to the test strip ( FIGS. 1A and 1B ) using any known means for transporting a biological sample, for example, a standard plastic pipet.
  • a biological sample for example, a standard plastic pipet.
  • Any analyte in the sample binds to the labeled antibody and the resulting complex migrates along the test strip.
  • the sample may be pre-mixed with the labeled conjugate prior to applying the mixture to the test strip.
  • the immobilized antibody therein binds the complex to form a sandwich complex, thereby forming a colored stripe.
  • Any unbound latex-conjugated antibody continues to migrate into a control zone where it is captured by a second immobilized antibody or other agent capable of binding the conjugate, and thereby forms a second colored stripe due to the aggregation of the dye-containing latex beads. This indicates that the assay run has completed.
  • the results of the assay are assessed using the reader and software provided herein.
  • the rapid test herein provides, at the very least, the same clinically relevant information as a fFN ELISA (an enzyme linked immunosorbent sandwich assay (ELISA) see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,281,522) test heretofore available, but in significantly less time and at the point of care.
  • a fFN ELISA an enzyme linked immunosorbent sandwich assay (ELISA) see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,281,522
  • This rapid fFN immunoassay allows the user to test a cervicovaginal swab sample in about 20 minutes.
  • images and digitize images such as symbologies, particularly bar codes or the lines and stripes produced on chromatographic immunoassay devices or on gels or photographic images thereof, such as the lines on DNA and RNA sequencing gels, X-rays, electrocardiograms, and other such data, is intended for use herein.
  • a sample is applied to a diagnostic immunoassay test strip, and colored or dark bands are produced.
  • the intensity of the color reflected by the colored label in the test region (or detection zone) of the test strip is, for concentration ranges of interest, directly proportional or otherwise correlated with an amount of analyte present in the sample being tested.
  • the color intensity produced is read, in accordance with the present embodiment, using a reader device, for example, a reflectance reader, adapted to read the test strip.
  • the intensity of the color reflected by the colored label in the test region (or detection zone) of the test strip is directly proportional to the amount of analyte present in the sample being tested. In other words, a darker colored line in the test region indicates a greater amount of analyte, whereas a lighter colored line in the test region indicates a smaller amount of analyte.
  • the color intensity produced i.e., the darkness or lightness of the colored line, is read using a reader device, for example, a reflectance reader, adapted to read the test strip.
  • a reflectance measurement obtained by the reader device is, in accordance with the present embodiment, correlated to the presence and/or quantity of analyte present in the sample as described hereinbelow.
  • the reader takes a plurality of readings along the strip, and obtains data that are used to generate results that are an indication of the presence and/or quantity of analyte present in the sample as described hereinbelow.
  • the system also correlates such data with the presence of a disorder, condition or risk thereof.
  • the reader may be adapted to read a symbology, such as a bar code, which is present on the test strip or housing and encodes information relating to the test strip device and/or test result and/or patient, and/or reagent or other desired information.
  • a symbology such as a bar code
  • the associated information is stored in a remote computer database, but can be manually stored.
  • the symbology can be imprinted when the device is used and the information encoded therein.
  • an exemplary embodiment of the reader device 600 is shown with an immunoassay device 200 , as shown in FIG. 2A , inserted into a cassette slot 602 therein.
  • the cassette slot 602 is adapted to receive the immunoassay device 200
  • a reader head assembly (not shown) supported within the reader device 600 is adapted to read the immunoassay test strip, and optionally a symbology, exemplified as a bar code, with the immunoassay device.
  • Such reading is performed by scanning a reader head (not shown) across the device, including a test window 214 in the immunoassay device 200 and a symbology, such as the exemplified bar code 216 , if present, and in the process directing light onto the bar code and/or a test portion and a control portion of the immunoassay test strip. An amount of such light reflected back from the bar code and/or the test portion and control portion of the immunoassay test strip is measured as the reader head scans across the device.
  • a data entry keypad 604 including ten digit keys (also labeled with letters of the alphabet, such as is commonly the case on telephone keypads), a delete key, a space key, an escape key, a print key, enter key, and up, down, left and right arrow keys, additional characters such as , or . or /, and any others desired by the user.
  • the data entry keypad 604 can be used by an operator of the reader device 600 to input identification information, to enter control test parameters, to initiate and terminate testing, and the like.
  • a processing unit housed within the reader device 600 is responsive to the keypad and performs data analysis functions, as described hereinbelow, in accordance with modifications made to a processor in the processing unit by an appropriate software subsystem.
  • the liquid crystal display screen 606 receives output data from the processing unit and displays it to an operator of the reader device 600 , including displaying results of tests, error messages, instructions, troubleshooting information, and the like.
  • FIG. 7 a perspective view of a lower housing 702 of one embodiment of an immunoassay reader device 600 of FIG. 6 is shown with a reader head assembly 704 located therein and the immunoassay device 200 inserted into the cassette slot 602 at a front edge of the lower housing 702 .
  • the cassette slot 602 located at the front edge of the lower housing 702 provides an aperture through which the immunoassay device 200 is inserted into and guided into the reader device 600 in order measure light reflected from an immunoassay test strip.
  • the reader is adapted to additionally read a symbology, such as a bar code, imprinted, engraved on or otherwise affixed to the test strip or device.
  • a reader head 706 on the reader head assembly 704 is positioned directly above the device 200 , such that the longitudinal (or major) axes of optical fibers within the reader head 706 are normal to a surface of the device, including the test strip and optionally a symbology that is imprinted, engraved or other wise affixed on the device.
  • the reader head 706 may be fixed, at least rotationally, and the immunoassay device 200 may be moved into position after insertion into the cassette slot 602 , such that the longitudinal (or major) axes of optical fibers within the reader head 706 are normal to a surface of the device to be read by the reader.
  • FIG. 8 a top view is shown of the lower housing 702 , the immunoassay device 200 , the cassette slot 602 , and a stepper motor 802 .
  • the immunoassay device 200 is positioned in alignment with the stepper motor 802 , which is part of the reader head assembly.
  • the stepper motor is used to scan the reader head 706 across the symbology, such as the exemplified bar code 216 and/or test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200 .
  • FIG. 9 Shown are the lower housing 702 , the immunoassay device 200 , the stepper motor 802 , an actuator wheel 902 , the reader head 706 , and linkages for moving the reader head 706 parallel to a major axis of the immunoassay device 200 in order to scan the reader head 706 across the symbology (bar code) 216 and/or test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200 .
  • the reader head is brought within a uniform distance of about 0.010 inches from the test strip.
  • the actuator wheel 902 and an actuator spring (not shown) work together to bring the reader head 706 down to within about 0.010 inches of the immunoassay test strip within the housing 202 of the immunoassay device 200 .
  • the reader head 706 is pivoted along with a portion of the reader head assembly.
  • the reader head 706 Prior to being brought into position within 0.010 inches of the immunoassay test strip, while the immunoassay device 200 is being inserted into or removed from the immunoassay reader device 600 , the reader head 706 assumes a retracted position, i.e., raised position, so that the immunoassay device 200 can be inserted into or removed from the immunoassay reader device 600 without crashing the reader head 706 into the immunoassay device 200 .
  • the immunoassay device 200 When the immunoassay device 200 is inserted into the cassette slot 602 , it contacts the actuator wheel 902 and causes a carriage assembly of the reader head assembly to be brought down from the retracted position so that the reader head 706 is within 0.010 inches of the immunoassay test strip.
  • Insertion of the immunoassay device 200 causes the actuator wheel to pop-up by applying pressure to the actuator spring, bringing the carriage assembly down from the retracted position.
  • the immunoassay device 200 is pushed into the cassette slot 602 until it meets a stop. Once inserted, the immunoassay device 200 , the actuator wheel 902 , and the actuator spring remain fixed in position, while the reader head 706 is stepped across the test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200 by the stepper motor 802 . In other words, only the reader head 706 moves during the scanning of the immunoassay test strip.
  • the immunoassay device 200 is pushed into the cassette slot 602 until it meets the stop. Once inserted the immunoassay device 200 may be rotated up to within 0.010 inches of the reader head 706 by gently lifting the immunoassay device 200 . By gently lifting the immunoassay device 200 , a base of the reader head assembly is pivoted up toward the carriage assembly and the reader head 706 , positioning the immunoassay test strip within 0.010 inches of the reader head 706 . Then the reader head 706 is then stepped across the test window 214 of the immunoassay test strip by the stepper motor 802 . In other words, in accordance with this alternative, only the reader head 706 moves during the scanning of the immunoassay test strip and, the reader head 706 moves only during the scanning of the immunoassay test strip.
  • the reader head 706 Prior to insertion of the immunoassay device 200 into the cassette slot 602 , and prior to scanning, the reader head 706 is positioned at a point that would place it approximately half way across (in the middle of) the test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200 .
  • the reader head 706 After insertion of the device 200 into the reader 600 , when an operator depresses a scan key on the key pad (see FIG. 6 ), the reader head 706 is moved from this position toward the stepper motor 802 until a microswitch is activated. Once the microswitch is activated, the reader head 706 is said to be in a “home” position from which scanning of the test strip commences. Once scanning commences, the reader head 706 advances from the home position across the test window 214 .
  • the reader head 706 scans in a direction moving away from the stepper motor toward the cassette slot 602 or to the left as depicted in FIG. 9 .
  • Total travel of the reader head 706 during scanning of the immunoassay test strip is 0.452 inches, which is achieved in 0.002 inch steps, which are 226 in number.
  • One set of readings is taken per step, with each set of readings including a dark reading, a first light reading and a second light reading.
  • the reader head assembly 1000 is shown. Shown are the actuator spring 1002 , the actuator 1004 , the base 1006 , the stepper motor 802 , the actuator wheel 902 , a rotor arm 1008 , and the reader head 706 . Also shown is a pivot point 1010 on which the carriage assembly 1012 , including the reader head 706 , stepper motor 802 , actuator wheel 902 , actuator spring, 1002 , and rotor arm 1008 pivot to assume a raised position for insertion and removal of the immunoassay device 200 from the reader device 600 and to assume a lowered position for scanning the reader head 706 across the test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200 .
  • FIG. 11 shown is a side view of the reader head 706 of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10 . Shown is a first light emitting diode (LED) 1102 , a second light emitting diode (LED) 1104 , a photodetector 1106 , a reader head aperture 1108 , and mounting holes 1110 .
  • LED light emitting diode
  • LED second light emitting diode
  • FIG. 12 a reverse angle side view is shown of the reader head assembly 1000 of FIG. 10 . Shown are the stepper motor 802 , the base 1006 , mounting holes 1202 , and a mounting bracket 1204 on which the reader head 706 is mounted.
  • FIG. 13 a reverse angle side view of the reader head 706 of FIG. 11 is shown. Seen are the mounting holes 1110 , and the reader head aperture 1108 .
  • FIG. 14 shown is a side view of the reader head assembly 1000 of FIG. 10 having assumed a retracted position. Shown are the actuator spring 1002 , the actuator arm 1004 , the stepper motor 802 , the reader head 706 , the reader head supporting bracket 1204 , the pivot 1010 on which such elements rotate, and a base 1006 relative to which such elements rotate.
  • the actuator arm 1004 , the actuator spring 1002 , the stepper motor 802 , the reader head 706 , the reader head mounting bracket 1204 , and mechanisms used for supporting and scanning the reader head 706 are designed so that the test strip 100 in the device 200 is positioned within 0.010 inches of the aperture 1108 of the reader head. Any design suitable to effect such can be employed with the present embodiment.
  • the actuator arm 1004 , the actuator spring 1002 , the stepper motor 802 , the reader head 706 , the reader head mounting bracket 1204 , and the mechanisms used for supporting and scanning the reader head 706 are shown rotated on the pivot 1010 such as would be the case, in accordance with the variation shown, when the immunoassay device 200 has been removed from the reader device 600 and/or as the immunoassay device 200 is being inserted into or removed from the reader device 600 .
  • FIG. 15 a side view is shown of the reader head 706 of FIG. 11 . Shown are the aperture 1108 and the first light emitting diode 1102 .
  • FIG. 16 an end view is shown of the reader head assembly 1000 of FIG. 10 . Shown is the stepper motor 802 , the base 1006 , and the actuator arm 1004 .
  • the reader is adapted to read a symbology, such as a bar code.
  • a symbology such as a bar code.
  • FIG. 24 An exemplary embodiment of a reader so-adapted is shown in FIG. 24 .
  • the reader head 2406 Prior to insertion of the device 300 (as shown in FIG. 2B ) into the cassette slot 602 , and prior to scanning, the reader head 2406 is positioned at a point that would place it approximately 0.125 inches from the forward edge of the device as it is inserted into the reader.
  • the device includes guide ridges 318 on either side of the bar code along the outer edges of the upper surface of the device.
  • the reader head 2406 is moved by the shaft 2408 of the stepper motor 2414 and scans in a direction moving away from the stepper motor toward the cassette slot 2412 .
  • the guide ridges 2412 contact the reader head assembly and act to compress the spring stage 2404 by 3° in order maintain the reader head 2406 at a distance of 0.010 inches above the bar code 2410 as the bar code 2410 is read.
  • the reader head assembly 2406 moves off the guide ridges 2412 , the spring stage 2404 returns to a level position (0°), and the reader head 2406 is repositioned at a distance of 0.010 inches in order to read the test strip.
  • the reader is moved in steps of approximately between 0.002-0.008 inches at a scan resolution of approximately 125-500 steps per inch, preferably about 250 steps per inch.
  • One set of readings is taken per step, with each set of readings including a dark reading, a first light reading and a second light reading.
  • a suitable mechanism is preferably employed to effect such positioning.
  • FIG. 17 shown is a side view partially in cross-section of an exemplary embodiment of the reader head. Shown are a first light emitting diode 1102 , a second light emitting diode 1104 and a photodetector 1106 . Also shown is an aperture 1108 and the mounting holes 1110 . Shown coupled between each of the LED's 1102 , 1104 and the aperture 1108 are first and second fiberoptic bundles 1702 , 1704 . Similarly, a third fiberoptic bundle 1706 is shown coupled between the aperture 1108 and the photodetector 1106 .
  • the first and second fiberoptic bundles 1702 , 1704 conduct light from the first and second LED's 1102 , 1104 , respectively, to the aperture 1108 .
  • the third fiberoptic bundle 1706 conducts light from the aperture 1108 to the photodetector 1106 .
  • the photodetector In response to such light, the photodetector generates a reflection signal, e.g., a voltage indicative of an amount of reflected light.
  • the electrical signal can be then processed and converted to a digital signal by using any method commonly known to those of skill in the art.
  • FIG. 18 shown is a closeup partial cross-sectional view of the aperture 1108 of FIG. 17 . Also shown are individual fiberoptic fibers 1802 , 1804 , 1806 of the fiberoptic bundles 1702 , 1704 , 1706 of FIG. 17 , positioned within the aperture 1108 so as to transmit light 1808 from the aperture 1108 onto the symbology (exemplified bar code) and/or test strip 100 and to receive reflected light 1808 from the bar code and/or test strip 100 entering the aperture 1108 . (The transmitted and reflected light 1808 is represented with an arrow.) As can be seen, a gap 1810 between the aperture 1108 and the bar code and/or test strip 100 is present. The gap 1810 preferably has a width of approximately 0.010 inches, which is maintained as the reader head 706 is scanned across the bar code and/or test window 214 of the test strip 200 .
  • FIG. 19 a bottom view is shown of individual fiberoptic fiber ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 positioned in the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706 of FIG. 10 so as to maximize the distribution of light emitted from individual fiberoptic fibers (fiberoptic conductors), and furthermore to maximize the uniformity of light received into individual fiberoptic conductors.
  • Individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 of the first fiberoptic bundle 1702 are individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 of the first fiberoptic bundle 1702 .
  • These individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 carry light emitted from the first light emitting diode from the first fiberoptic bundle through the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706 .
  • fiberoptic conductor ends 1904 of the second fiberoptic bundle 1704 are fiberoptic conductor ends 1904 of the second fiberoptic bundle 1704 . These individual fiberoptic conductor ends carry light emitted from the second light emitting diode to the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706 . Without cross-hatching are shown individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1906 of the third fiberoptic bundle 1706 . The third fiberoptic bundle 1706 carries light entering the aperture 1108 to the photodetector.
  • the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 By employing the particularly advantageous arrangement of the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 at the aperture 1108 , uniform distribution emissions and light reception is achieved. Such arrangement is said to be a “sigmoidal” (S-like or serpentine) arrangement or a “sigmoidal” distribution. It is an important feature of the present embodiment that the fiberoptic fibers in each of the three groups are arranged along with fiberoptic fibers from the remaining groups in a sigmoidal-like (or “S”-like) pattern with three columns of thirteen fiberoptic fibers each. An arrangement that achieves this feature is intended herein.
  • 39 fiberoptic conductors are positioned within the aperture 1108 .
  • a clamp assembly made up of a “U”-shaped channel, and an “I”-shaped clamp positioned at the open side of the “U” is employed.
  • the fiberoptic conductors, portions of which protrude from the aperture 1108 are placed between the “U”-shaped channel and the “I”-shaped clamp and a compressive force is applied thereto by the “I”-shaped clamp, holding the protruding portions of the fiberoptic conductors firmly in position.
  • a resin is then poured into the reader head 706 so as to become interposed between and around the fiberoptic conductors at the aperture 1108 .
  • the clamp assembly is removed, and the protruding portions of the fiberoptic conductors are trimmed back flush with the aperture 1108 , so as to define a planar surface of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 at the aperture 1108 .
  • This planar surface is held parallel to a plane at an upper surface of the immunoassay test strip 100 during scanning of the immunoassay test strip.
  • the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 are set in the resin, and trimmed, as described above, in individual fiberoptic conductors are tested by projecting light individually through the fiberoptic conductors toward the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 , to locate the fiberoptic conductor end associated with the particular fiberoptic conductor being tested. This determination is made by observing which of the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 “lights up” when light is transmitted down the particular fiberoptic conductor.
  • the fiberoptic conductors are assigned to one of the first, second, and third fiberoptic bundles, so as to achieve, for example, the sigmoidal distribution of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 illustrated in FIG. 19 .
  • FIG. 20 a cross-sectional view of a first fiberoptic bundle 1702 is shown with individual fiberoptic elements 2002 selected to effect the sigmoidal distribution of FIG. 19 .
  • 13 individual fiberoptic elements are present in the fiberoptic bundle 1702 , which is the same number of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 depicted in FIG. 19 for each of the three fiberoptic bundles 1702 , 1704 , 1706 .
  • the fiberoptic bundle 1702 shown in FIG. 17 carries the light from the first light emitting diode to the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706 .
  • Cross-sectional views of the second and third fiberoptic bundles are similar to that shown in FIG. 20 .
  • FIGS. 21, 22 and 23 three schematic views are shown illustrating a process for reading test results from immunoassay test strip 100 with the control region 2102 and the detection region 2104 depicted thereon.
  • blue latex particles are detected in the test region and the control region on a nitrocellulose support.
  • the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706 in a dark reading mode ( FIG. 21 ), a first light reading mode ( FIG. 22 ) and a second light reading mode ( FIG. 23 ).
  • the reader head assembly includes the first light-emitting diode (which in the present example is a blue LED), the second LED (which in the present example is an amber LED), a silicon photodiode detector, and fiberoptic fibers arranged with fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 in the sigmoidal distribution in the aperture 1108 (0.002 inches wide), which is located at the bottom (or tip) of the reader head 706 at a point nearest the immunoassay test strip, when the immunoassay device is inserted into the immunoassay reader device. It is understood that the selection of LEDs will be dependent upon the signal produced in the test; all detectable electromagnetic wavelengths, preferably visible light, are contemplated herein. Fluorescence and other such labeling means also are contemplated herein.
  • the blue LED and the amber LED emit light of specified wavelengths ( ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 , respectively). It should be understood that any suitable wavelengths may be selected. Such selection is dependent on the particular assay with which the immunoassay reader device is being employed. The wavelengths selected are selected so as to allow removal of effects of the background of the immunoassay test strip or symbology, e.g., bar code, from the reflectance readings, and to optimize a reading of a reduction in reflectance associated with accumulated label at the reaction regions of the immunoassay test strip.
  • the first light emitting diode (LED 1 ) i.e., the blue LED
  • the same wavelengths can be used to read a symbology, such as a bar code, associated with the assay device.
  • the first fiberoptic bundle 1702 transmits blue light to the aperture 1108 in the reader head 706 where it is emitted at an orientation normal to a plane at the upper surface of the symbology (exemplified bar code) or test strip.
  • the second fiberoptic bundle 1704 transmits the amber light to the aperture in the reader head 706 where it is emitted at an orientation normal to the plane at the upper surface of the bar code or test strip.
  • individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 of the first and second fiberoptic bundles 1702 , 1704 , along with individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1906 from the third fiberoptic bundle 1706 are arranged in three groups of thirteen optical fibers each: the first group from the first fiberoptic bundle 1702 , which transmits light emitted by the blue LED to the aperture 1108 ; the second group from the second fiberoptic bundle 1704 , which transmits light emitted by the amber LED to the aperture 1108 ; and the third group, which transmits reflected light received at the aperture 1108 through the third fiberoptic bundle 1706 to the photodetector.
  • the thirty-nine fibers each include respective fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 arranged in the sigmoidal distribution (or pattern) (see FIG. 19 ) at the aperture 1108 such that the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 are co-planar at the aperture and in the plane parallel to the plane at the upper surface of the bar code or test strip, when the reader head 706 is positioned to take measurements from the bar code or test strip 100 .
  • each fiberoptic fiber (or conductor) has a longitudinal axis that is normal to the plane at the upper surface of the bar code or test strip.
  • light emitted from the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 is directed in a direction substantially normal to this surface plane.
  • the fiberoptic fibers in each of the three groups are arranged along with fiberoptic fibers from the remaining groups in a sigmoidal (or “S”-like) pattern with three columns of thirteen fibers each.
  • the reader head 706 is positioned directly over the bar code or test opening of the assay device such that the longitudinal axes of the optical fibers at their ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 at the aperture, are normal to a plane at the surface of the immunoassay test strip and the ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 of the fibers at a distance of about 0.010 inches.
  • Light from the first LED and the second LED is transmitted by the fibers onto the bar code or assay test strip at an angle normal to the upper surface of the immunoassay device, and light is reflected normally back from the strip to the ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 . This reflected light is transmitted by the fibers of the third fiberoptic bundle to the photodetector.
  • the reader head 706 takes three separate reflectance readings ( FIGS. 21, 22 and 23 , respectively) from each position at which it reads of the immunoassay test strip. Such measurements are made by reading an output of the photodetector (which is a voltage) while controlling the first and second LED's.
  • the first reading is used to determine an amount of ambient (or background) light leaking into the immunoassay device (e.g., light leaking through the cassette slot entrance, or light reflected/transmitted into the reader through the housing of the immunoassay device, which may be, for example, white plastic.
  • the first reading is a “dark” reading taken with the blue LED and the amber LED both turned off. This dark reading (which is a voltage at the photodetector) is digitized in a conventional manner using an analog to digital converter, and may be subtracted by the processing unit from other “light” readings made in response to blue LED illumination and amber LED illumination so as to correct for this light leakage.
  • the second reading used to determine levels of light reflections associated with the background of the bar code or the assay test strip itself, is taken with the blue LED pulsed on and the amber LED turned off.
  • the third reading, used to detect the bar code or the presence of the label on the assay test strip is taken with the amber LED pulsed on and the blue LED turned off.
  • a control circuit (including the processing unit, which includes a processor, such as a microprocessor) receives the digitized output of the photodetector for all three readings, controls the on and off operation of the blue LED and the amber LED, controls when photodetection readings are taken, and controls the position of the reader head 706 by controlling the stepper motor.
  • a memory circuit stores raw and/or processed data (i.e., readings from the photodetector). The data also may be displayed to the operator via the LCD display of the immunoassay reader device 600 .
  • the reader head 706 After being positioned above the housing, the reader head 706 is moved (scanned) across the bar code and/or test strip by the stepper motor under the control of the control circuit to allow the reader head 706 to scan the exposed surface of the bar code and/or assay test strip (including the detection and control zones through the test window 214 in the immunoassay device).
  • the distance between reader head 706 and the bar code or assay test strip 200 is approximately 0.010.′′
  • the reader head 706 is slidably connected to a rail (e.g., guide rods), and is coupled to a worm or screw gear driven by the stepper motor.
  • a rail e.g., guide rods
  • the stepper motor drives the reader head 706 along the rail in small steps.
  • the control circuit takes the three readings described above (“dark”, blue LED illuminated, amber LED illuminated).
  • the control circuit moves the reader head 706 such that the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 , 1904 , 1906 pass directly above and normal to the exposed surface of the bar code and/or test strip in a sequence of small steps.
  • a sequence of “dark”, blue LED and amber LED readings are taken and recorded.
  • the raw data read from the photodetector is then processed by the control circuit to discern the symbology, such as a bar code pattern, in order to provide information regarding the assay device and/or test run and/or reagents, and/or patient and/or to read the test strip to determine the presence or concentration of analyte in the sample.
  • symbology such as a bar code pattern
  • the detection and control latex stripes are each about 0.020′′ wide, and since each step of the sensing head is about 0.002′′ long, there will be about 10 steps within each stripe, i.e., within the test region and the control region.
  • there will be 10 sets of three readings i.e., dark, blue LED and amber LED
  • 10 sets of three readings i.e., dark, blue LED and amber LED
  • the remainder of the reading sets will not be made over either the test region or the control region.
  • the reader head 706 when the assay device is inserted into the cassette slot of the reader device 600 , the reader head 706 is positioned over the bar code or test strip, and the control circuit then moves the head to an initial (or home) position.
  • the control circuit moves (scans) the head across the exposed surface of the bar code or test strip, including the test region and the control region of the strip, in small increments.
  • the control circuit takes the first reading ( FIG. 21 ) of the photodetector output with the blue LED and the amber LED, both off, takes the second reading ( FIG. 22 ) with the blue LED pulsed on and the amber LED off, and takes a third reading ( FIG. 23 ) with the blue LED off and the amber LED pulsed on.
  • the control circuit then steps the reader head 706 by controlling the stepper motor and repeats the three readings at its new location. For the test strip, this process is repeated for each of 226 steps (0.452′′ at 0.002′′/step) until the surface of the assay test strip is read.
  • the length of the bar code is typically approximately 1 inch in length, and a step size of approximately 0.002-0.008 inches are used; thus between approximately 125-500 steps are performed.
  • the raw reflectance data is then analyzed by the control circuit in accordance with appropriate software control to identify the symbology, such as a bar code or determine the presence or concentration of the analyte in the sample.
  • the reader is used to read a bar code associated with the test device
  • the data collected from the bar code are transformed into integrated peak information and analyzed as alphanumeric characters to provide information about the assay device and/or test run.
  • the reader is used to detect an analyte
  • the data collected from the test strip are compared to a threshold or reference reflectance value to determine the presence or concentration of the analyte.
  • the output can be displayed via an operator interface, or can be output to another computer or apparatus.
  • the systems herein include software for data analysis.
  • Data analysis includes any algorithms or methodology for obtaining diagnostically relevant information from the raw data. Simple algorithms as well as decision-support systems, particularly neural networks are contemplated herein.
  • the data analysis methodology includes, some or all of the following steps: (1) optionally correcting the reflectance readings to correct for light leakage; (2) reducing the raw reflectance data by using a ratiometric formula; (3) generating an image of the test data by plotting the reduced data; (4) expressing this image as a polynomial mathematical function, for example, by using a combination of a flat or parabolic image to represent the baseline and two gaussian curves to represent the peaks; (5) using a curve-fitting algorithm to generate parameters to define the image; (6) optimizing the reconstruction of the image and producing a fitted image; (7) comparing the scanned image and fitted image by solving the linear regression through the curves; (8) validating the parameters obtained from the curve-fitting and the peak heights obtained; and (9) classifying the validated result as positive or negative by comparing peak heights of a clinical sample to reference samples.
  • the method may further include: (10) using the test result with other patient information in a decision-support system to generate a medical diagnosis or risk assessment.
  • the parameters used to define the image, as in (5) above, and to classify the sample, as in (9) above, can be generated using trained neural networks.
  • the raw reflectance data obtained from the instrument are stored as an array of points containing a number of rows (n) corresponding to the number of points at which readings were taken along the test strip, and a number of columns (m) corresponding to the reflectance readings taken at each point, including background or dark readings and readings at different wavelengths.
  • the reflectance readings are processed by first subtracting the dark reading taken at the corresponding step to correct for light leakage, which typically is negligible.
  • the algorithm is based upon the ratio of readings at the different wavelengths and calculates a reduced data set (1 ⁇ n), which is used to generate a curve from the original reflectance data.
  • a new column of reduced data is generated by using the ratiometric formula.
  • the size of the matrix is 4 ⁇ 226, where 4 is the number of columns of data collected and 226 is the number of steps, or readings, taken along the test strip.
  • the first column contains information about the location on the test strip from which the data is obtained; the second column is the reflectance in the absence of illumination by the instrument (dark reading); the third column is the reflectance when the test strip is illuminated at the first wavelength (e.g. 430 nm); and the fourth column is the reflectance when the test strip is illuminated at the second wavelength (e.g. 595 nm).
  • the information in the second column is usually zero, unless a light breach has occurred with the instrument.
  • the reflectance values in the third and fourth column are preferably in the 3,000-24,000 range.
  • the matrix size would be between 4 ⁇ 125 and 4 ⁇ 500.
  • the algorithm calculates a reflectance ratio for each step, generating a fifth column of data.
  • the information contained in the first, third and fourth columns can be converted into an image by plotting the first column (x-value) against the fifth column (y-value).
  • the original data array has been converted to a 2-dimensional image, or an array of the size 1 ⁇ 226.
  • the reflectance ratio is then plotted as a function of each step. In reading an assay test strip, as described above, the result is a two-peak graph with the peaks occurring at the two stripes, corresponding to the detection and control zones.
  • the reflectance data may then be further processed to obtain an accurate determination of analyte concentration in the patient sample.
  • a graph is produced that corresponds to the reflectance pattern of the bar code. Pattern matching is then performed using any of a number of methods commonly known to those of skill in the art in order to identify the bar code and associate it with the particular assay run.
  • the image created by a plot of the data obtained from reading an assay test strip, as described above, has three basic components: a baseline or background that is either flat or parabolic; a peak corresponding to the detection zone that is gaussian; and another peak corresponding to a control zone that also is gaussian.
  • f ( y ) Area*[exp ⁇ (x ⁇ )(x ⁇ )/2 ⁇ * ⁇ ]/( ⁇ (2 ⁇ ) 1/2 )
  • a second plot can be generated from the three component curves, using 9 variables. This process is accomplished using a curve-fit algorithm. Any such algorithm known in the art may be used. Alternatively, the 9 parameters may be obtained using neural networks, as described below. From the parameters generated from the curve-fit function, a showfit function is used to generate an image from the fitted data. For example, in the preferred embodiment, a showfit function is used to generate a 1 ⁇ 226 matrix representing the fitted curve defined by the 9 parameters.
  • the peak height of the curve in the detection zone is determined by subtracting the parabolic baseline from the maximum peak height. The peak height is then compared to that of a previously run sample of known analyte concentration. If the peak height of the clinical sample is greater that the peak height of the reference sample, then the test result is positive. If not, a negative test result is returned.
  • the peak height of the curve representing the control zone also may be checked to determine if it meets a required minimum height, in order to test that the system is functioning.
  • peak areas may be calculated and compared to give a determination of analyte concentration in the sample.
  • the graph may be mathematically analyzed, with a sigmoidal calculation across the background and a gaussian calculation to integrate the area beneath each of the two peaks.
  • the analyte concentration is then determined based upon the ratio of the integrated area beneath each of the two peaks.
  • Parameters for a mathematical function designed to reproduce, or approximate the scanned image are effective at determining the concentration of the compound being tested and thereby providing a means to classify the sample being tested.
  • Examination of the data, for example, from the fFN test provided herein demonstrates that a scanned image can be constructed from three basic elements. There is a background density, referred to herein as the baseline density. Superimposed on the baseline are the two peaks. The first peak is referred to as the control peak and the second is the test peak. Since the shape of these peaks is very similar to a normal curve, it was assumed that the peaks have a gaussian shape.
  • One characteristic of the “normal curve” that can be exploited is that the area under the curve is always 1.0. By modifying the formula, the height of a peak can be determined from a single function parameter.
  • Peak Density Height*EXP( ⁇ Z*Z )
  • the basic method of this optimization uses an iterative approach to optimize the function parameters based on a defined cost function.
  • the cost function is defined as the sum of the squares of the differences between the original image and the reconstructed image for every pixel in the scanned image.
  • the downhill simplex method uses a simplex to accomplish this optimization.
  • a simplex is a geometrical figure in N dimensions containing N+1 points. For the image density function defined above, N has the value 9. In two dimensions, for example, a simplex will contain 3 points, with lines connecting each pair of points. This simplex is called a triangle. As the dimension increases, the complexity of the simplex also increases. In three dimensions a simplex is a tetrahedron. This implies that if there are N parameters to be optimized, then N+1 solutions must be maintained. This translates to N 2 +N storage locations that are required to run the algorithm.
  • the optimization problem with 2 parameters is as follows.
  • the simplex, a triangle, is formed from three points or three different sets of values for the parameters. These three points (call them solutions A, B and C), which are generated in the following way.
  • solutions A, B and C which are generated in the following way.
  • each parameter is perturbed by a small amount (typically 0.01).
  • solution B is generated.
  • solution C is generated.
  • the three solutions must be evaluated to determine the error function value for each.
  • solution A has the highest error function value.
  • the simplex algorithm attempts to make an improvement by picking a new point (solution, or set of parameters), that lowers the error function value. This basic operation is called a reflection.
  • the new error function value for the normal reflection is better than the best current solution, then an expansion reflection is attempted.
  • the line from A is extended by the Step Up Factor (typically 1.50) through the average point. This operation makes the simplex larger.
  • the point that gave the best error function value is retained as the new A point.
  • the new error function value for the normal reflection is still the worst solution, then a contraction reflection is attempted.
  • the line from A is extended by the Step Down Factor (typically 0.75) through the average point. This operation makes the simplex smaller. If this solution is better than the original error function value for point A, the reflection point is retained as point A. If no improvement is made in the A solution, then the entire simples is contracted by moving each point toward the point with the best error function value by the fraction specified by the Shrink Factor (typically 0.95). These reflection operations continue until the difference between the best and worst solutions falls below the Restart Tolerance (typically 1.0E ⁇ 9).
  • a neural network can be used as an alternative to a polynomial mathematical function for the purpose of generating parameters that can be used to reconstruct an image.
  • the basic architecture of the neural network contains at least three processing layers.
  • a sequence of example images are presented to the network for training. Training continues so that the error between each image and its reconstruction is minimized across the set of images used for training.
  • the image, or a subsection of the image is presented to the input layer of the network.
  • the middle layer, or hidden layer, of the network contains a number of processing element that is much smaller then the number of inputs in the input layer.
  • the output layer contains the same number of processing elements as the input layer.
  • the output layer of the network will represent the reconstructed image that is presented to the input layer.
  • An alternative architecture contains an odd number of hidden layers, with the middle hidden layer containing a much smaller number of processing elements than the input and output layers.
  • each processing element is connected to each of the processing element outputs of the previous layer.
  • the processing element used in the network typically generates a weighted sum of the inputs to processing element, with a transfer function applied to the weighted sum to generate the output of the processing element.
  • the transfer function is any such function normally used in a neural network, including the sigmoid function, or the hyperbolic tangent function.
  • the neural network can be trained using any standard neural network training rule, including the back propagation learning rule.
  • a training image is presented to the inputs of the neural network.
  • the same image also is be presented to the outputs of the network as the desired, or target, output of the network.
  • the error between the outputs of the neural network and the desired outputs of the network decreases.
  • the neural network middle hidden layer In order for the error to decrease, the neural network middle hidden layer generates a greatly reduced representation of the input image that contains enough information to reconstruct the image. This reduced representation therefore also contains the information needed to classify the image.
  • a new image is presented to the inputs of the neural network.
  • the outputs of the middle hidden layer are then be used as the inputs to the classification means for further processing.
  • a second alternative method for reducing an image to useful parameters is to substitute the neural network directly in place of the polynomial mathematical function.
  • the inputs of the neural network are the coordinates of the pixel in the image being examined.
  • the desired output of the network are the density value of the associated pixel.
  • the architecture of this neural network is substantially smaller then the architecture described in the first alternative method.
  • the weights of the neural network become the parameters to be used by the classifier.
  • the types of processing elements used in this architecture include the radial basis function type, and provisions might be made to allow a mix of processing element types in the hidden layer of the neural network.
  • the architecture is developed to provide the smallest possible number of weights while still being capable of reconstructing the image.
  • the neural network is trained only on the image under consideration. Thus, each time a sample is tested, the network would be retrained. The weights of the trained network are used as inputs to the classification means.
  • the parameters generated from the image reconstruction process along with several parameters easily calculated from the scanned image are used to classify the sample.
  • the image parameters from several reference scans were used.
  • the process of classification incorporates two steps. The first is a validation step to determine if the sample under consideration should be rejected or classified. The validated result is then classified as positive or negative as described above.
  • Validation protocols are used to confirm that all components of a system operate properly, and that the data received from the system is meaningful. Moreover, in systems where raw data from instruments are manipulated by software, the proper functioning of that software should also be validated.
  • Validation of data analysis software can be performed in any number of ways. Typically, a known sample (e.g., reference, positive control, negative control) can be tested in the system to validate that the expected result is obtained. Alternatively, known raw data can be stored in memory and acted upon by the data analysis software to validate that the expected result is obtained. Such validation protocols ensure that the software is operating properly before a clinical sample of interest is evaluated by that system.
  • a known sample e.g., reference, positive control, negative control
  • known raw data can be stored in memory and acted upon by the data analysis software to validate that the expected result is obtained.
  • Validation of test systems also can be performed during the evaluation of a clinical sample being tested by that system.
  • These types of validation protocols can evaluate components of the system, either individually or together. When the criteria set by validation protocols are not achieved, an invalid result is obtained, and the user will be made aware of the system malfunction. Such processes ensure that only accurate test results are presented to the user.
  • data are validated by several methods.
  • the data are checked for completeness by checking that the size of the matrix is m ⁇ n, where m is the number of columns of data collected (e.g., location on dipstick, dark reading, reflectance at ⁇ 1 and reflectance at ⁇ 2 ) and n is the number of steps, or readings, taken along the test strip.
  • the matrix must be of an exact size of 4 ⁇ 226.
  • the maximum peak heights must meet certain minimum values or the test data are invalid. For example, if the sample in question is a fFN positive reference (i.e. about 50 ng/ml of fFN) in the fFN point of care test (POCT), then the maximum control peak height must be between 0.200 and 1.500 units (inclusive) and the maximum test peak height must be between 0.020 and 0.310 units (inclusive) or the result is invalid.
  • fFN positive reference i.e. about 50 ng/ml of fFN
  • POCT point of care test
  • the maximum test peak height of the positive control i.e, a control sample that always yields a positive result, typically about 70 to 80 ng/ml for the fFN POCT
  • the maximum test peak height of the positive reference must be greater than the maximum test peak height of the positive reference, or the result is invalid.
  • the maximum test peak height of the negative control must be less than the maximum test peak height of the positive reference, or the result is invalid.
  • a run is only valid when the results of the fFN positive reference, positive control and negative control are all valid.
  • the maximum control test peak height must be greater than about 0.20 units, or the result for that sample is invalid. Note, however, that the run may remain valid.
  • the slope For comparison of the fitted image and the scanned image by solving the linear regression, the slope must be between 0.99 and 1.10, or the result is invalid. If the sample is a positive reference, positive control or negative control, then the run is invalid. If the sample is a clinical sample, then the run remains valid. The value of r 2 must be greater than 0.78, or the result is invalid. If the sample is a positive reference, positive control or negative control, then the run is invalid. If the sample is a clinical sample, the run remains valid.
  • the test result is positive. If the maximum peak height of the clinical sample is less than the maximum peak height of a negative reference, the result is negative.
  • the validated result is then classified as positive or negative as follows:
  • the areas under the curves can be compared. The same data are obtained, if the area under the curve from a clinical sample is compared to the area under the curve of the 50 ng/ml reference sample.
  • the initial training runs used the parameters generated from the image reconstruction process along with several parameters easily calculated from the scanned image.
  • One such parameter is the area under a peak. It can be calculated from original parameters as following:
  • one or more networks are trained to estimate the classification of the sample. If more than one network is used, the outputs of each network are averaged together to give a consensus result.
  • the nine variables may optionally be fed through a previously trained neural network to obtain a test result.
  • the nets may be trained with data for which ELISA test results are known.
  • variables other than the nine described above may be used to train the neural net. The nets can be used not only to return positive or negative results, but also to determine if the assay itself is valid for any particular run.
  • the reduction of data for input to neural networks can be accomplished by a neural network itself.
  • An example of such a net is a net with an hourglass architecture with an input, output and three hidden layers, wherein the input and output layers contain n nodes, with the first and third hidden layers containing less than n nodes, and the second hidden layer containing five nodes. If trained so that the output layer exactly matches the input layer, such nets would reduce the original dataset of n elements down to five elements, and also retain the ability to reconstruct the original dataset of n elements from these five elements.
  • the output from the data analysis step provides an assessment of the raw biochemical test data that is measured by the reader or other instrument.
  • Such data may then be considered as is, but is can be further entered into a decision-support system, particularly a neural network, that has been trained to evaluate the particular data and disease.
  • a decision-support system particularly a neural network, that has been trained to evaluate the particular data and disease.
  • 08/798,306 and corresponds to U.S. application Ser. No. 08/912,133 describe neural nets and methods for developing neural networks for diagnosis of disorders. The accuracy of biochemical test data is improved when used in these neural nets. Such neural nets, are thus contemplated for inclusion in the systems herein.
  • patient data or information typically patient history or clinical data
  • decision-support systems are trained on the patient data.
  • Patient data are augmented by biochemical test data or results to refine performance.
  • the resulting decision-support systems are employed to evaluate specific observation values and test data to guide the development of biochemical or other diagnostic tests, to assess a course of treatment, to identify new diagnostic tests and disease markers, to identify useful therapies, and to provide the decision-support functionality for the test.
  • Methods for identification of important input variables for medical diagnostic tests for use in training the decision-support systems to guide the development of the tests, for improving the sensitivity and specificity of such tests, and for selecting diagnostic tests that improve overall diagnosis of, or potential for, a disease state and that permit the effectiveness of a selected therapeutic protocol to be assessed also are provided.
  • the methods for identification can be applied in any field in which statistics are used to determine outcomes.
  • a method for evaluating the effectiveness of any given diagnostic test also is provided.
  • neural networks or other decision-support systems will be included in the systems provided herein as a means of improving performance of the biochemical test data.
  • the test strip 100 includes a membrane system including three components: a porous or bibulous member 102 ; a conjugate pad 108 ; and an absorbent pad 110 .
  • the membrane system may be mounted on a substrate or backing 112 , with the conjugate pad 108 and the absorbent pad 110 slightly overlapping the porous or bibulous member 102 , which is interposed therein between.
  • the conjugate pad 108 overlaps the porous or bibulous member 102 so that a fluid sample placed onto the conjugate pad 108 is communicated from the conjugate pad 108 to the porous or bibulous member 102 .
  • the absorbent pad 110 overlaps with the porous or bibulous member 102 so that fluid samples introduced into the porous or bibulous member 102 from the conjugate pad 108 can then be transmitted to the absorbent pad 110 .
  • the conjugate pad 108 , the absorbent pad 110 and the porous or bibulous member 102 are all in fluid communication with one another, making any fluid sample placed on the conjugate pad 108 able to propagate through the conjugate pad 108 to the porous or bibulous member 102 and then to the absorbent pad 110 .
  • the porous or bibulous member is capable of transporting a liquid sample along the test strip and serves as the solid support upon which the immunoreactions occur.
  • Antibodies which react with the target analyte and/or label are immobilized on the solid support.
  • Possible solid supports include paper and cellulose derivatives, such as cellulose esters and ethers, natural and synthetic polymeric materials, such as vinyl polymers and partially hydrolyzed derivatives, polycondensates, copolymers and inorganic materials.
  • a preferred solid support is a nitrocellulose membrane.
  • the porous or bibulous member contains two distinct zones, a detection zone 104 and a control zone 106 , at which two different antibodies are immobilized.
  • the detection zone contains an immobilized capture antibody that binds the analyte of interest, whereas the control zone contains an immobilized antibody or other component, such as an antigen, that binds labeled antibody conjugate (discussed below) which has not bound to analyte.
  • the membrane system also includes a conjugate pad 108 , which serves as a sample application component, and which includes an antibody to the analyte, which is conjugated to a detectable label.
  • the conjugate pad is in fluid communication with the porous or bibulous member 102 .
  • the labeled antibody conjugate is diffusively bound to the conjugate pad and becomes mobile upon application of the liquid sample and moves along the test strip.
  • the conjugate pad is made of a porous material, such as glass fiber.
  • the conjugate pad also may act as a pre-filter for the sample.
  • the membrane system also may include an absorbent pad 110 , which also is in fluid communication with the porous or bibulous member, and which serves to draw liquid continuously through the device.
  • the absorbent strip may be made of a material such as cellulose paper or other material known to those of skill in the art.
  • the housing 202 generally surrounds the test strip 100 ( FIGS. 1A and 1B ) and includes an opening through which test sample is applied 204 , as well as an aperture above the detection and control zones 206 that permits measurement of the amount of label by the reader, which is correlated with the amount of analyte in the test sample.
  • the housing 202 includes at its upper surface 208 a fattened end 210 , used for gripping the housing 202 , an application window 204 (or sample window) through which a sample is applied to a conjugate pad 108 of an immunoassay test strip within the housing 202 .
  • the housing 202 also includes a test window 214 through which the test result of the immunoassay is viewed.
  • no window material is mounted within the test window 214 (or the sample window 212 ).
  • an optical path from outside the housing 202 through the test window 214 to the immunoassay test strip is unobscured by even a transparent material.
  • Other alternative embodiments may include an optically transparent material (transparent at wavelengths emitted by light emitted from devices described herein), however, such is not preferred. Also, as shown in FIG. 2A and FIG.
  • the housing may include a symbology, exemplified as a bar code 216 or 316 that can be read by the reader or a separate reading device and associated with identifying information pertaining to the particular device and/or test run or other information.
  • a symbology exemplified as a bar code 216 or 316 that can be read by the reader or a separate reading device and associated with identifying information pertaining to the particular device and/or test run or other information.
  • FIG. 2B An alternative embodiment of the test device is shown in FIG. 2B .
  • the components of device are shown in FIG. 3 and include the upper and lower members 302 and 304 of the housing and the test strip 100 . Also shown are the sample application port 306 , test window 308 , and the optionally included bar code 316 .
  • FIG. 4 a top view is shown of the immunoassay test strip housing 202 of FIG. 2A . Shown are the sample window 212 , and the test window 214 , and the enlarged gripping portion 210 . Also shown are structures 402 for holding the immunoassay test assembly within the housing 202 and structures 404 for securing upper and lower halves of the housing 202 to one another.
  • FIG. 5 a side cross-sectional assembly view is shown of the housing 202 for the immunoassay test strip 100 . Shown are the sample window 212 , the test window 214 , and the structures 402 for holding the immunoassay test strip assembly in place within the housing 202 . As can be seen, an upper half 502 of the housing 202 is mated with a lower half 504 of the housing 202 . The immunoassay test strip is sandwiched between the upper and lower halves 502 and 504 of the housing 202 and is secured in place by the structures 402 of the upper half 502 . The immunoassay test strip is positioned so as to be viewable through the test window 214 when the immunoassay test strip assembly is secured within the housing and the conjugate pad is positioned to be contactable through the sample window 212 .
  • the immunoassay test strip includes a membrane system supported on a plastic backing.
  • the membrane system is formed from three partially overlapping materials: a conjugate pad made of Whatman glass fiber (F075-07S, 2.4 cm length) treated with polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), a nitrocellulose strip supplied by Sartorius (8 ⁇ m, 3.3 cm length) and an absorbent pad made of Whatman C7218 (1.65 cm length) cellulose paper. These three materials are in fluid communication with each other.
  • the conjugate pad and nitrocellulose overlap by 1 mm and the nitrocellulose and absorbent pad overlap by 4 mm.
  • the membrane materials are hand-laminated and attached to a membrane card, which is cut using an Azco guillotine compression cutter, using G&L adhesive membrane.
  • the conjugate pad contains a mouse monoclonal anti-fFN antibody (FDC-6 or A137) conjugated to latex particles containing a blue dye.
  • the conjugate pad acts as a pre-filter for the sample in that mucous from the sample is left behind in the conjugate pad after performing the assay.
  • the latex particles which are polymerized from styrene and acrylic acid, may be any suitable latex particles (such as are available from Bangs Laboratories).
  • the particles are polymerized in an aqueous solution with a surfactant added.
  • the particles are internally labeled with blue dye by swelling the particles in organic solvent and adding the dye.
  • the particles are then placed in an aqueous solvent, which shrinks the particles and traps the dye.
  • the dye is an organic soluble blue dye. Carboxyl groups are covalently attached to the surface of the bead for coupling to the antibody.
  • the particles are supplied as a 2.5-10% aqueous suspension containing surfactant as Bangs Uniform Microsphere Stock D0004031 CB and have a mean diameter of 0.40 ⁇ m, with a standard deviation of 0.4 ⁇ m, and a surface area of 1.405e+13 ⁇ M 2 /g.
  • Antibodies are conjugated to the latex particles in a one-step covalent conjugation process using EDAC, a carbodiimide coupling reagent.
  • the conjugate is characterized as 1% solids; 50 ⁇ g/mg beads total bound protein (Bead BCA); and >80% covalent bound protein (Tris-SDS+Bead BCA).
  • the antibody conjugated to the latex particles is mouse monoclonal antibody specific for fetal fibronectin.
  • the antibody (FDC-6 or A137 monoclonal) is raised against whole molecule onco-fetal fibronectin from a tumor cell line.
  • the antibody is produced as ascites at a contract manufacturer and is purified by Protein G and dialyzed into PBS buffer.
  • the nitrocellulose strip contains two distinct zones, a detection zone and a control zone, at which two different antibodies are immobilized.
  • the detection zone contains immobilized anti-fibronectin polyclonal antibody as a capture antibody, whereas the control zone contains immobilized goat anti-mouse polyclonal antibody.
  • the anti-fibronectin polyclonal antibody is produced in goats.
  • the antisera is obtained from a commercial source and is purified by use of a fibronectin column which is made by attaching purified fibronectin (antigen) to a resin. The antisera is passed through a column containing the resin. After washing unbound material, the antibody is eluted via low pH glycine. The purified antibody is then dialyzed.
  • the goat anti-mouse IgG antibody (GAMGG) immobilized in the control zone is obtained from Biosource.
  • the antibody is purified by passing the serum through a mouse IgG column, which binds the antibody, and then eluting off the antibody using glycine.
  • the antibodies are applied to the conjugate pad and nitrocellulose strip using an IVEK Linear Striper, which is a volumetric ceramic piston pump dispenser.
  • the anti-fibronectin polyclonal capture antibody is applied in a 1 ⁇ Spotting Buffer P/N 00387, which contains citrate, phosphate and NaCl, at an antibody concentration of 1 mg/ml and a striping rate of 1 ⁇ l/sec.
  • the position of the test line is 3740 mm from the bottom of the strip.
  • the control antibody is applied in a 1 ⁇ Spotting Buffer P/N 00387 at a concentration of 0.5 mg/ml and a striping rate of 1 ⁇ l/sec.
  • the position of the control line is 43-46 mm from the bottom of the strip.
  • the dimensions of the antibody stripes are approximately 7.5 mm (wide) ⁇ 0.5-1.0 mm (high).
  • the nitrocellulose strip is not otherwise treated after application of the capture and control antibodies to block non-specific binding sites.
  • the detection and control stripes are applied to the strip and then dried for 60 minutes at RT, after which the conjugate is striped onto the strip.
  • the conjugate is mixed in a diluent containing 20% sucrose, 0.2% BSA, 0.5% TW20 and 100 mm Tris. After application of the conjugate, the strip is then dried for 30 min. at 37° C.
  • the test strip is contained within a housing, which includes a lower member and an upper member with openings that include a circular aperture above the area of the conjugate pad, through which test sample is applied, and a rectilinear aperture above the detection and control zones.
  • the circular application aperture is in contact with the test strip.
  • the latex conjugate is placed slightly downstream from the sample application opening.
  • the upper and lower members are mated together to sandwich the test strip.
  • the test strip is confined non-removably in the housing, and the device is not intended to be re-usable.
  • the upper member is configured for use with a reader that measures the amount of label that is indicative of the amount of fetal fibronectin in the test sample.
  • colloidal gold is used for labeling the antibody.
  • the test strip configuration is similar to that described in EXAMPLE 1A for the latex particle embodiment, with the following modifications.
  • a goat polyclonal antibody to human adult and fetal fibronectin is present in the conjugate pad
  • immobilized mouse monoclonal anti-fetal fibronectin antibody (specific to the III CS region of fetal fibronectin) is present in the detection zone of the nitrocellulose test strip and immobilized human adult fibronectin is present in the control zone.
  • the anti-fibronectin antibodies are labeled with colloidal gold by passively adsorbing anti-fibronectin antibodies onto colloidal gold.
  • This preparation is then treated with a solution containing protein and polyvinyl pyrrolidone (PVP) to coat the colloidal gold particles.
  • PVP polyvinyl pyrrolidone
  • the sample is extracted from a swab into antiprotease transfer buffer (0.05 M Tris buffer, pH 7.4, 1% BSA, 5 mM EDTA, 1 mM phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride (PMSF), and 500 Kallikrein Units/ml of Aprotinin), heated for 15 min. at 37° C. and filtered through a large pore (25 ⁇ ) plunger filter. A volume of 200 ⁇ l of test sample is then delivered to the conjugate pad at the application zone using a standard plastic pipet. Any fFN in the sample will bind to the labeled monoclonal antibody and the resulting complex migrates into the nitrocellulose strip.
  • antiprotease transfer buffer 0.05 M Tris buffer, pH 7.4, 1% BSA, 5 mM EDTA, 1 mM phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride (PMSF), and 500 Kallikrein Units/ml of Aprotinin
  • the immobilized anti-FN antibody binds the complex, thereby forming a colored stripe due to the aggregation of the dye-containing latex beads.
  • Any unbound latex-conjugated anti-fFN antibody continues to migrate into the control zone where it is captured by the immobilized goat anti-mouse antibody and thereby forms a colored stripe due to the aggregation of the dye-containing latex beads.
  • the reaction time is 20 minutes.
  • test strip assay procedure is similar to that described in EXAMPLE 2A for the latex particle embodiment, with the following modifications.
  • the buffer used to extract the sample is Tris-acetate and a protein matrix (4% PSA and 4% PVP).
  • Fetal fibronectin and adult human fibronectin in the sample bind with the labeled anti-fibronectin antibody conjugate on the conjugate pad.
  • the labeled fetal fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complex and adult human fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complexes, and unbound labeled anti-fibronectin conjugate migrate into the nitrocellulose strip, where they encounter the detection region, including immobilized anti-fetal fibronectin monoclonal antibody.
  • the immobilized anti-fetal fibronectin capture antibody binds with the fetal fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complex, whereby a gold label forms a colored stripe due to the concentration of the gold label.
  • the amount of gold label bound to the test region correlates with the amount of fetal fibronectin in the sample.
  • the unbound labeled anti-fibronectin antibody conjugate and adult human fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complex then pass to the control region of the immunoassay test strip, which includes immobilized adult human fibronectin.
  • any unbound antibody conjugate binds to the immobilized adult human fibronectin, where the gold label forms a second colored stripe.
  • the presence of a colored stripe indicates that the assay results are valid, whereas the absence of this stripe indicates that the results are not valid, i.e., that the sample did not reach the control region, and thus a good reading at the test region cannot be assumed.
  • Any adult human fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complexes formed do not bind with the detection or control zones.
  • the test strip is read using the reflectance reader exemplified herein.
  • This reader (described above) is adapted to read an immunochromatographic test strip supported within the housing.
  • the reflectance reader includes a cassette slot for receiving the test-strip housing, and a sensing head assembly for reading the test strip supported within the test-strip housing using reflected light.
  • the sensing head assembly includes a first light-emitting diode (LED 1 ), a second LED (LED 2 ), a silicon photodiode detector, and 39 optical fibers randomly arranged in a narrow slit (e.g., 0.020′′ wide) located at the bottom of the sensing head assembly.
  • the optical fibers are arranged in three groups of 13 optical fibers each: the first group transmits light emitted by LED 1 to the slit; the second group transmits light emitted by LED 2 to the slit; and the third group transmits reflected light received at the slit to the photodetector.
  • the 39 fibers each include an end randomly arranged within a plane located at the slit such that the ends are co-planar, with the plane being normal to the test strip when the sensing head assembly is positioned (as described below) to take reflectance readings.
  • the optical fibers in each of the three groups are randomly arranged within the plane with respect to the fibers of the other two groups.
  • the slit width is selected to be as narrow as permitted, with the practical minimum being driven by the availability of small diameter optical fibers.
  • the maximum slit width should not be larger than about 90% of the width of the colored stripe, otherwise the background of the strip, in addition to the colored stripe, will be read and less color will be detected, unless the slit, or aperture, is positioned directly above the colored stripe.
  • a spring mechanism rotates the sensing head directly over the second aperture of the housing such that the plane defined by the optical fibers is normal to the surface of the nitrocellulose strip at a distance of about 0.010.′′
  • Light from LED 1 and LED 2 can be transmitted by the fibers onto the nitrocellulose strip at a normal angle, and light reflected normally from the strip can be transmitted by the fibers to the photodetector.
  • the sensing head takes three separate reflectance readings of each portion of the nitrocellulose strip by reading the output of the photosensor while controlling LED 1 and LED 2 .
  • the first reading used to determine the amount of ambient light leaking into the reader (e.g., light leaking through the slot entrance, or light reflected into the reader through the white plastic of the housing), is a dark reading taken with LED 1 and LED 2 both turned off. The dark reading count is subtracted from the other two readings to correct for light leakage.
  • the second reading used to determine background reflections associated with the nitrocellulose, is taken with LED 1 pulsed on and LED 2 turned off.
  • the third reading used to detect the presence of the latex label on the test strip, is taken with LED 2 pulsed on and LED 1 turned off.
  • a control circuit reads the photodetector output and controls the on and off operation of LED 1 and LED 2 .
  • a memory circuit stores the raw and/or processed data. The data also may be displayed to the operator via an appropriate interface (e.g., an alphanumeric character matrix).
  • the sensing head can be moved slidably across the test strip to allow the head to scan the entire exposed surface of the nitrocellulose strip (including the detection and control zones). In the preferred embodiment, this distance is approximately 0.452.′′
  • the head is slidably connected to a rail (e.g., guide rods), and is coupled to a worm or screw gear driven by a stepper motor. Under the control of the control circuit, the stepper motor drives the head along the rail in small steps (e.g., 0.002′′/step). At each step, the control circuit takes three readings as described above.
  • control circuit moves the head such that the optical fibers pass directly above and normal to the exposed surface of the nitrocellulose strip in a sequence of small steps, and takes a sequence of dark, LED 1 and LED 2 readings at each step.
  • the control circuit then processes the data read from the photodetector at each sequence of three readings to determine the presence or concentration of fFN.
  • the control circuit processes the LED 1 and LED 2 readings by first subtracting the “dark reading” taken at the corresponding step to correct for light leakage.
  • the corrected LED 1 and LED 2 readings are then input into a ratiometric algorithm to determine the concentration of fFN.
  • the algorithm is based upon the ratio of readings at the detection and control zones. If a sample includes a high concentration of fFN, latex readings at the detection zone will be relatively high and the readings at the control zone will be low. If the sample includes a low concentration of fFN, however, latex readings at the detection zone will be relatively low and readings at the control zone will be high.
  • the algorithm calculates a reflectance ratio for each step which equals (amber count ⁇ dark count)/(blue count ⁇ dark count).
  • the reflectance ratio is graphed as a function of the steps, the result will be a two-peak graph with the peaks occurring at the two stripes.
  • the graph is mathematically analyzed, with a sigmoidal calculation across the background and a gaussian calculation to integrate the area beneath each of the two peaks.
  • the fFN concentration is then determined based upon the ratio of the integrated area beneath each of the two peaks.
  • the sensing head rotates down over the exposed nitrocellulose strip, and the control circuit then moves the head to an initial position.
  • the control circuit moves the head across the exposed surface of the nitrocellulose strip, including the detection and control zones, in small increments of 0.002′′ each.
  • the control circuit takes a first reading of the photodetector output with LED 1 and LED 2 both off, takes a second reading with LED 1 pulsed on and LED 2 off, and takes a third reading with LED 1 off and LED 2 pulsed on.
  • the control circuit then steps the sensing head and repeats the three readings. This process is repeated for each of 226 steps (0.452′′ at 0.002′′/step) until the entire surface is read.
  • the control circuit may then analyze the raw data to determine the presence or concentration of fFN.
  • the output values can be displayed via an operator interface, or can be output to another computer or apparatus.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Primary Health Care (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Gynecology & Obstetrics (AREA)
  • Reproductive Health (AREA)
  • Pregnancy & Childbirth (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Materials By Optical Means (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Biological Materials (AREA)
  • Measurement And Recording Of Electrical Phenomena And Electrical Characteristics Of The Living Body (AREA)
  • Ultra Sonic Daignosis Equipment (AREA)
  • Apparatus For Radiation Diagnosis (AREA)

Abstract

Systems and methods for medical diagnosis or risk assessment for a patient are provided. These systems and methods are designed to be employed at the point of care, such as in emergency rooms and operating rooms, or in any situation in which a rapid and accurate result is desired. The systems and methods process patient data, particularly data from point of care diagnostic tests or assays, including immunoassays, electrocardiograms, X-rays and other such tests, and provide an indication of a medical condition or risk or absence thereof. The systems include an instrument for reading or evaluating the test data and software for converting the data into diagnostic or risk assessment information.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/877,122 to Emory V. Anderson, Edward Nemec, Jerome Lapointe, Duane DeSieno, Ricardo Martinez, Gail Marzolf, Ronald Pong, Lynn Jones, Robert O. Hussa and Andrew Senyei, entitled “POINT OF CARE DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEMS,” filed Jun. 25, 2004, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/717,478 to Emory V. Anderson, Edward Nemec, Jerome Lapointe, Duane DeSieno, Ricardo Martinez, Gail Marzolf, Ronald Pong, Lynn Jones, Robert O. Hussa and Andrew Senyei, entitled “POINT OF CARE DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEMS,” filed Nov. 20, 2000, which is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/063,497, filed Apr. 20, 1998, and now U.S. Pat. No. 6,394,952, and a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/017,901, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,267,722, filed Feb. 3, 1998 to Emory V. Anderson, Edward Nemec, Jerome Lapointe, Duane DeSieno, Ricardo Martinez, Gail Marzolf, Ronald Pong, Lynn Jones, Robert O. Hussa and Andrew Senyei, entitled “POINT OF CARE DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEMS.” Priority under 35 U.S.C. '120 is claimed to these applications.
  • This application also is related to abandoned U.S. application Ser. No. 08/599,275 to Jerome Lapointe and Duane DeSieno, filed Feb. 9, 1996, entitled “METHOD FOR DEVELOPING MEDICAL AND BIOCHEMICAL DIAGNOSTIC TESTS USING NEURAL NETWORKS,” abandoned U.S. application Ser. No. 08/798,306 to Jerome Lapointe and Duane DeSieno, filed Feb. 7, 1997, entitled “METHOD FOR SELECTING MEDICAL AND BIOCHEMICAL DIAGNOSTIC TESTS USING NEURAL NETWORK-RELATED APPLICATIONS,” and U.S. application Ser. No. 08/912,133, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,678,669, to Jerome Lapointe and Duane DeSieno, filed Aug. 14, 1997, entitled “METHOD FOR SELECTING MEDICAL AND BIOCHEMICAL DIAGNOSTIC TESTS USING NEURAL NETWORK-RELATED APPLICATIONS.” This application also is related to U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,096,830, 5,185,270, 5,223,440, 5,236,846, 5,281,522, 5,468,619 and 5,516,702.
  • The subject matter of each of these patents and each of U.S. application Ser. Nos. 10/877,122, 09/717,478, 09/017,901, 08/599,275, 08/798,306 and 08/912,133 is herein incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The subject matter of published International PCT application No. WO 97/29447, which corresponds to U.S. application Ser. No. 08/912,133 also is herein incorporated in its entirety by reference thereto. Also incorporated by reference are design patent patents D434,153 and D432,244, based on design applications 29/086,781 and 29/086,799, respectively, each filed Apr. 20, 1998.
  • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to systems and methods that aid in providing a medical diagnosis or risk assessment for a patient using biochemical and historic patient data, including data from point of care diagnostic tests or assays, and processing the information to give an indication of a medical condition or risk.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Evaluation of Immunoassay Data
  • In diagnostic immunochromatographic assays, where results are determined by a color change or the production of color, results are generally detected visually by human eye. As a result of the human perception and judgment involved, there is significant variance among those interpreting such test results as to whether a color change or other measurable signal has occurred, and the degree of such occurrence. Furthermore, there is a great deal of subjectivity involved in interpreting whether immunoassay results are positive or negative. This is particularly pronounced where the result is close to a threshold value. The variance is further enhanced when attempts are made to quantitate such assay test results. Accurate results may be critical for certain diagnostic assays.
  • It is desirable to develop techniques that are objective in nature, and that reduce the error associated with interpreting immunochromatographic and other assay test results. Therefore, it is an object herein to provide systems, methods, devices and instruments for objectively assessing data from biochemical and other tests and to use such data for diagnosis and risk assessment. It also is an object herein to incorporate decision-support methodologies into such systems and thereby enhance the diagnostic and risk assessment capabilities thereof.
  • It also is an object herein to provide systems and methods for use in detecting and measuring fetal fibronectin (fFN) levels in a patient sample and using such information to diagnose and assess risks of preterm labor, fetal membrane rupture and other related disorders and conditions.
  • SUMMARY
  • Systems and methods for medical diagnosis or risk assessment for a patient are provided. These systems and methods are designed to be employed at the point of care, such as in emergency rooms, operating rooms, hospital laboratories and other clinical laboratories, doctor's offices, in the field, or in any situation in which a rapid and accurate result is desired. The systems and methods process patient data, particularly data from point of care diagnostic tests or assays, including immunoassays, chemical assays, nucleic acid assays, calorimetric assays, fluorometric assays, chemiluminescent and bioluminescent assays, electrocardiograms, X-rays and other such tests, and provide an indication of a medical condition or risk or absence thereof.
  • The systems include an instrument for reading or evaluating the test data and software for converting the data into diagnostic or risk assessment information. In certain embodiments, the systems include a test device, such as a test strip, optionally encased in a housing, for analyzing patient samples and obtaining patient data. In particular embodiments, the device includes a symbology, such as a bar code, which is used to associate identifying information, such as intensity value, standard curves, patient information, reagent information and other such information, with the test device. The reader in the system is optionally adapted to read the symbology.
  • Further, the systems optionally include a decision-support system or systems, such as a neural network, for evaluating the digitized data, and also for subsequent assessment of the data, such as by integration with other patient information, including documents and information in medical records. All software and instrument components are preferably included in a single package. Alternatively, the software can be contained in a remote computer so that the test data obtained at a point of care can be sent electronically to a processing center for evaluation. Thus, the systems operate on site at the point of care, such as in a doctor's office, or remote therefrom.
  • The patient information includes data from physical and biochemical tests, such as immunoassays, and from other procedures. The test is performed on a patient at the point of care and generates data that can be digitized, such as by an electronic reflectance or transmission reader, which generates a data signal. The signal is processed using software employing data reduction and curve fitting algorithms, or a decision support system, such as a trained neural network, or combinations thereof, for converting the signal into data, which is used to aid in diagnosis of a medical condition or determination of a risk of disease. This result may be further entered into a second decision support system, such as a neural net, for refinement or enhancement of the assessment.
  • In a particular embodiment, systems and methods for detecting and measuring levels of a target analyte in a patient sample, analyzing the resulting data, and providing a diagnosis or risk assessment are provided. The systems and methods include an assay device in combination with a reader, particularly a computer-assisted reader, preferably a reflectance reader, and data processing software employing data reduction and curve fitting algorithms, optionally in combination with a trained neural network for accurately determining the presence or concentration of analyte in a biological sample. The methods include the steps of performing an assay on a patient sample, reading the data using a reflectance reader and processing the reflectance data using data processing software employing data reduction algorithms. In a particular embodiment, the assay is an immunoassay. Preferred software includes curve fitting algorithms, optionally in combination with a trained neural network, to determine the presence or amount of analyte in a given sample. The data obtained from the reader then can be further processed by the medical diagnosis system to provide a risk assessment or diagnosis of a medical condition as output. In alternative embodiments, the output can be used as input into a subsequent decision support system, such as a neural network, that is trained to evaluate such data.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the assay device is a lateral flow test strip, preferably, though not necessarily, encased in a housing, designed to be read by the reader, and the assay is a sandwich immunoassay. For example, in one embodiment thereof, a patient sample is contacted with an antibody for a selected target analyte indicative of a disease, disorder or risk thereof. The antibody is preferably labeled by conjugation to a physically detectable label, and upon contacting with the sample containing the target analyte forms a complex. The antibody-analyte complex is then contacted with a second antibody for the antigen, which is immobilized on a solid support. The second antibody captures the antibody-analyte complex to form an antibody-analyte-antibody sandwich complex, and the resulting complex, which is immobilized on the solid support, is detectable by virtue of the label. The test strip is then inserted into a reader, where the signal from the label in the complex is measured. Alternatively, the test strip could be inserted into the reader prior to addition of the sample. Additionally, the housing may include a symbology, such as a bar code, which also is read by the reader and contains data related to the assay device and/or test run. The signal obtained is processed using data processing software employing data reduction and curve fitting algorithms, optionally in combination with a trained neural network, to give either a positive or negative result, or a quantitative determination of the concentration of analyte in the sample, which is correlated with a result indicative of a risk or presence of a disease or disorder. This result can optionally be input into a decision support system, and processed to provide an enhanced assessment of the risk of a medical condition as output. The entire procedure may be automated and/or computer-controlled.
  • In certain embodiments, the reflectance reader is adapted to read a symbology on the test device. The symbology is preferably a bar code, which can be read in the same manner that the test strip in the device can be read. In these embodiments, the reader head scans across a bar code in a stepwise fashion. The data collected from the bar code is transformed into integrated peak information and analyzed as alphanumeric characters, which are related to information related to the particular device and/or test run or other information, including patient information. Any bar code from among the many known in the industry can be employed. In preferred embodiments, Code 39 (a trademark of Interface Mechanism, Inc., Lynnwood, Wash.; see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,379,224, U.S. Pat. No. 4,438,327, U.S. Pat. No. 4,511,259 or Code 128 bar codes (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,227,893) are used.
  • In a particular embodiment, the analyte to be detected is fetal fibronectin (fFN) and the result obtained is a positive or negative indication of pregnancy or the risk of certain pregnancy-related conditions or fertility and infertility-related conditions, including ectopic pregnancy, preterm labor, pre-eclampsia, imminent delivery, term induction and fetal membrane rupture. Thus, provided herein is a rapid fFN test using a lateral flow test device. At the very least, this test provides the same clinically relevant information as a fFN ELISA (an enzyme linked immunosorbent sandwich assay (ELISA)) test heretofore available in significantly less time and at the point of care. The fFN immunoassay provided herein allows the user to test a cervicovaginal swab sample in about 20 minutes. When practiced as described herein, additional information, such as a more accurate risk assessment or diagnosis, can be obtained.
  • The system herein provides a means to detect and to quantitate concentrations of fFN throughout pregnancy and to assess the risk and detect conditions associated therewith. Because of the sensitivity of the combination of the reader and devices provided herein, fFN may be monitored throughout pregnancy, including times when it is not detected by less sensitive systems.
  • The reflectance reader and test strip device also are provided herein. Also provided herein are the neural nets for assessing the data.
  • A method for classifying an image also is provided. The method includes the steps of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters from which the image can be reconstructed within a predetermined degree of tolerance; inputting the derived parameters into a classification neural network; and determining the classification of the image based on the output of the classification neural network. The method of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters is achieved by defining a mathematical function that contains a plurality of parameters representative of the image; and optimizing the parameters of the function using a methodology that minimizes the error between the image and a reconstruction of the image using the function.
  • In an alternative embodiment, the method of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters is achieved by inputting the image into a trained neural network, where the inputs to the network represent the image, the hidden layer of the network is such that the number of hidden elements is smaller than the number of inputs to the network, and the outputs of the network represent reconstruction of the image; and setting the derived parameters to the output values of the trained neural network.
  • In another alternative embodiment, the method of reducing the image to a set of derived parameters is achieved by defining a neural network in which the inputs to the network are the coordinates of a point in the image, the hidden layer contains a plurality of elements, and the output of the network represents the reconstruction of the associated point in the image; training the neural network so that the error between the network output and the image are minimized for all points in the image; and setting the derived parameters to the weights of the hidden layer of the trained neural network.
  • The neural networks and computer systems used in the methods also are provided.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1A is a top view of an assay test strip, such as an immunoassay test strip;
  • FIG. 1B is a side view of the assay test strip of FIG. 1;
  • FIG. 2A is a perspective view of an assay device, including the assay test strip of FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B and housing assembly and showing a bar code, which can optionally be affixed to the housing;
  • FIG. 2B is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of an assay device, including the assay test strip of FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B and housing assembly and showing a bar code, which can optionally be affixed to the housing;
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the assay device of FIG. 2B showing the individual components of the device;
  • FIG. 4 is a top view of an exemplary housing assembly for the assay test strip of FIG. 1;
  • FIG. 5 is a side assembly view of the housing assembly of FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 6 is a top view of an embodiment of an assay reader and an assay device, inserted therein, in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the reader;
  • FIG. 7 is a perspective view of portion of the assay device of FIG. 2A shown inserted into a cassette slot of a lower housing and extending to a reader head assembly within an exemplary embodiment of an assay reader;
  • FIG. 8 is a top view of the lower housing of the assay reader of FIG. 7 with the assay device inserted therein and a stepper motor shown positioned relative to the assay device as is when the assay device is fully inserted into the cassette slot of the reader;
  • FIG. 9 is a side view of the lower housing of the reader device of FIG. 7 with the assay device of FIG. 2A fully inserted with the stepper motor shown positioned relative to the fully inserted assay device, with a reader head shown positioned in a lowered position over a test opening of the assay device, and with a carriage wheel shown engaged by the assay device so as to lower the reader head into its lowered position therein;
  • FIG. 10 is a side view of a reader head assembly such as is found in the reader device of FIG. 6;
  • FIG. 11 is a side view of a reader head of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10;
  • FIG. 12 is a reverse angle side view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10;
  • FIG. 13 is a reverse angle side view of the reader head of FIG. 11;
  • FIG. 14 is a side view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10, having been actuated so as to pivot the reader head assembly into a raised position suitable for insertion and removal of the assay device into and from the reader head assembly within the assay reader;
  • FIG. 15 is an end view of the reader head of FIG. 11;
  • FIG. 16 is an end view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10;
  • FIG. 17 is a cut-away view of the reader head assembly of FIG. 11 with first and second light emitting diodes, a photodetector, corresponding fiberoptic bundles and an aperture at a lower end thereof depicted;
  • FIG. 18 is a partial closeup cross-sectional view of a reader head tip of the reader head of FIG. 17 showing the aperture and ends of fiberoptic fibers of the fiberoptic bundles of FIG. 17;
  • FIG. 19 is a closeup bottom view of the aperture of the reader head of FIGS. 17 and 18 illustrating a sigmoidal pattern for positioning individual fiberoptic fibers (fiberoptic conductors);
  • FIG. 20 is a closeup end view of the corresponding fiberoptic bundle at the first light emitting diode of FIG. 17 from which the fiberoptic bundle conducts light from the first light emitting diode;
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram illustrating a process by which an assay test strip is analyzed so as to determine an amount of background light at a control region of the assay test strip;
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram illustrating a process by which an assay test strip is analyzed so as to determine an amount of reflection resulting from a first illumination of a control portion of the assay test strip; and
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic view diagram illustrating a process by which an assay test strip is analyzed so as to determine an amount of reflection resulting from a second illumination of a control portion of the assay test strip;
  • FIG. 24 is a side view of an exemplary embodiment of the reader that is adapted for reading a bar code; and
  • FIG. 25 is an example of a bar code in accordance with an exemplary embodiment of the assay device.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Definitions
  • Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of skill in the art to which this invention belongs. All patents and publications referred to herein are, unless noted otherwise, incorporated by reference in their entirety. In the event a definition in this section is not consistent with definitions elsewhere, the definition set forth in this section will control.
  • As used herein, point of care testing refers to real time diagnostic testing that can be done in a rapid time frame so that the resulting test is performed faster than comparable tests that do not employ this system. For example, the exemplified fFN immunoassay, is performed in less time than the fFN ELISA assay (i.e., less than about 3 to 4 hours, preferably less than 1 hour, more preferably less than half an hour). In addition, with the method and devices provided herein, it can be performed rapidly and on site, such as in a doctor's office, at a bedside, in a stat laboratory, emergency room or other such locales, particularly where rapid and accurate results are required. The patient can be present, but such presence is not required. Point of care includes, but is not limited to: emergency rooms, operating rooms, hospital laboratories and other clinical laboratories, doctor's offices, in the field, or in any situation in which a rapid and accurate result is desired.
  • As used herein, an anti-fFN antibody is an antibody that binds selectively with fFN. Such antibodies are known to those of skill in the art and also may be readily isolated.
  • As used herein, a test strip refers to any means on which patient test data or other data is generated, recorded or displayed in a manner that forms an image or from which an image can be generated. Such strips, include, but are not limited to, immunochromatographic test strips, such as lateral flow devices, X-ray films, such as X-rays and films produced from sequencing gels, EKG printouts, MRI results and other such means that generate or from which an image as defined herein can be generated. The strip is preferably adapted for scanning or reading by a reader, preferably the reader provided herein. Although referred to as a “strip,” it can be of any shape or geometry, including rectangular, three dimensional, circular, and so forth.
  • As used herein, a sigmoidal pattern (also referred to herein as sigmoidal-like; see, e.g., FIG. 19) with reference to the fiberoptics refers to the S-shaped or snake-like pattern of illumination selected for maximizing illumination across the lines on the test strip. The pattern is not strictly a sigmoidal shape, but refers to a pattern such as that depicted in FIG. 19, which pattern provides a means for adding more area to any reading. Any other pattern that achieved this result is encompassed within this expression.
  • As used herein, quantitative results are results that are absolute or relative values; qualitative results are typically negative or positive type results.
  • As used herein, fetal restricted antigens refers to antigen that are present in pregnant women uniquely, or in substantially elevated amounts compared to non-pregnant women in maternal serum, plasma, urine, saliva, sweat, tears and other bodily fluids.
  • As used herein, fetal fibronectin is a fetal restricted antigen found in placenta, amniotic fluid and fetal connective tissue. It differs structurally from adult fibronectins. Fetal fibronectin is not present in significant quantities in maternal plasma or serum. Fetal fibronectin may be captured with a general binding antibody, such as an anti-fibronectin antibody, or an anti-fetal restricted antigen antibody, such as anti-fetal fibronectin antibody.
  • As used herein, an immunoassay is defined as any method using a preferential binding of an antigen with a second material, a binding partner, usually an antibody or another substance having an antigen binding site, which binds preferentially with an epitope of the fetal restricted antigen. Preferential binding, as used herein, refers to binding between binding partners that is selective and generally specific, and demonstrates less than 10%, preferably less than 5%, cross-reactive nonspecific binding. The immunoassay methods provided herein include any known to those of skill in the art, including, but not limited to, sandwich, competition, agglutination or precipitation, for example.
  • As used herein, a solid support refers to the material to which the antibody is linked. A variety of materials can be used as the solid support. The support materials include any material that can act as a support for attachment of the molecules of interest. Such materials are known to those of skill in this art. These materials include, but are not limited to, organic or inorganic polymers, natural and synthetic polymers, including, but not limited to, agarose, cellulose, nitrocellulose, cellulose acetate, other cellulose derivatives, dextran, dextran-derivatives and dextran copolymers, other polysaccharides, glass, silica gels, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, rayon, nylon, polyethylene, polypropylene, polybutlyene, polycarbonate, polyesters, polyamides, vinyl polymers, polyvinylalcohols, polystyrene and polystyrene copolymers, polystyrene cross-linked with divinylbenzene or the like, acrylic resins, acrylates and acrylic acids, acrylamides, polyacrylamides, polyacrylamide blends, copolymers of vinyl and acrylamide, methacrylates, methacrylate derivatives and copolymers, other polymers and co-polymers with various functional groups, latex, butyl rubber and other synthetic rubbers, silicon, glass, paper, natural sponges, insoluble protein, surfactants, red blood cells, metals, metalloids, magnetic materials, or other commercially available media.
  • As used herein, a reader refers to an instrument for detecting and/or quantitating data, such as on test strips. The data may be visible to the naked eye, but does not need to be visible.
  • As used herein, a reflectance reader refers to an instrument adapted to read a test strip using reflected light, including fluorescence, or electromagnetic radiation of any wavelength. Reflectance can be detected using a photodetector or other detector, such as charge coupled diodes (CCD). A preferred reflectance reader, which is provided and described herein, includes a cassette slot adapted to receive a test-strip, light-emitting diodes, optical fibers, a sensing head, including means for positioning the sensing head along the test strip, a control circuit to read the photodetector output and control the on and off operation of the light-emitting diodes, a memory circuit for storing raw and/or processed data, and a photodetector, such as a silicon photodiode detector.
  • As used herein, a sensing head refers to the assembly which is adapted to read a test strip using reflected light or other electromagnetic radiation. Thus, the sensing head in the reader provided herein refers to the part of the sensing head assembly that randomizes the optical bundles and arranges the fibers in the plane normal to the test strip.
  • As used herein, color refers to the relative energy distribution of electromagnetic radiation within the visible spectrum. Color can be assessed visually or by using equipment, such as a photosensitive detector.
  • As used herein, a color change refers to a change in intensity or hue of color or may be the appearance of color where no color existed or the disappearance of color.
  • As used herein, a decision-support system, also referred to as a “data mining system” or a “knowledge discovery in data system”, is any system, typically a computer-based system, that can be trained on data to classify the input data and then subsequently used with new input data to make decisions based on the training data. These systems include, but are not limited, expert systems, fuzzy logic, non-linear regression analysis, multivariate analysis, decision tree classifiers, Bayesian belief networks and, as exemplified herein, neural networks.
  • As used herein, an adaptive machine learning process refers to any system whereby data are used to generate a predictive solution. Such processes include those effected by expert systems, neural networks, and fuzzy logic.
  • As used herein, an expert system is a computer-based problem solving and decision-support system based on knowledge of its task and logical rules or procedures for using the knowledge. The knowledge and the logic are entered into the computer from the experience of human specialists in the area of expertise.
  • As used herein, a neural network, or neural net, is a parallel computational model comprised of densely interconnected adaptive processing elements. In the neural network, the processing elements are configured into an input layer, an output layer and at least one hidden layer. Suitable neural networks are known to those of skill in this art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,251,626; 5,473,537; and 5,331,550, Baxt (1991) “Use of an Artificial Neural Network for the Diagnosis of Myocardial Infarction,” Annals of Internal Medicine 115:843; Baxt (1992) “Improving the Accuracy of an Artificial Neural Network Using Multiple Differently Trained Networks,” Neural Computation 4:772; Baxt (1992) “Analysis of the clinical variables that drive decision in an artificial neural network trained to identify the presence of myocardial infarction,” Annals of Emergency Medicine 21:1439; and Baxt (1994) “Complexity, chaos and human physiology: the justification for non-linear neural computational analysis,” Cancer Letters 77:85).
  • As used herein, a processing element, which also may be known as a perceptron or an artificial neuron, is a computational unit which maps input data from a plurality of inputs into a single binary output in accordance with a transfer function. Each processing element has an input weight corresponding to each input which is multiplied with the signal received at that input to produce a weighted input value. The processing element sums the weighted inputs values of each of the inputs to generate a weighted sum which is then compared to the threshold defined by the transfer function.
  • As used herein, a transfer function, also known as a threshold function or an activation function, is a mathematical function which creates a curve defining two distinct categories. Transfer functions may be linear, but, as used in neural networks, are more typically non-linear, including quadratic, polynomial, or sigmoid functions.
  • As used herein, an image is a multi-dimensional array of data points, where each data point is represented by a number, or a set of numbers, and where there is a relationship between adjacent points in each of the dimensions. The index values in each dimension typically represent a linear relationship, like position or time, but are not limited to these types of relationships. A single digitized scan line from a TV frame would be considered a two dimensional image. In the case of the preferred embodiment, an image refers to a one-dimensional set of pixels, which encode the intensity of the color on the test strip.
  • As used herein, classifying an image refers to associating an object or state with the image. Images of fruit might be classified as to the type of fruit shown in the image. In the case of the preferred embodiment, classifying the test strip image refers to associating the positive or negative state with the image.
  • As used herein, reconstructing an image refers to producing an image from a mathematical function. When an image is represented by a mathematical function, there may be errors in the representation due to any number of factors.
  • As used herein, backpropagation, also known as backprop, is a training method for neural networks for correcting errors between the target output and the actual output. The error signal is fed back through the processing layer of the neural network, causing changes in the weights of the processing elements to bring the actual output closer to the target output.
  • As used herein, Quickprop is a backpropogation method that was proposed, developed and reported by Fahlman (“Fast Learning Variations on Back-Propagation: An Empirical Study,” Proceedings on the 1988 Connectionist Models Summer School, Pittsburgh, 1988, D. Touretzky, et al., eds., pp. 38-51, Morgan Kaufmann, San Mateo, Calif.; and, with Lebriere, “The Cascade-Correlation Learning Architecture,” Advances in Neural Information Processing Systems 2, (Denver, 1989), D. Touretzky, ed., pp. 524-32. Morgan Kaufmann, San Mateo, Calif.).
  • As used herein, diagnosis refers to a predictive process in which the presence, absence, severity or course of treatment of a disease, disorder or other medical condition is assessed. For purposes herein, diagnosis will also include predictive processes for determining the outcome resulting from a treatment.
  • As used herein, risk refers to a predictive process in which the probability of a particular outcome is assessed.
  • As used herein, a patient or subject includes any mammals for whom diagnosis is contemplated. Humans are the preferred subjects.
  • As used herein, biochemical test data refers to data from any analytical methods, which include, but are not limited to: immunoassays, bioassays, including nucleic acid and protein based assays, chromatography, data from monitors, and imagers; measurements and also includes data related to vital signs and body function, such as pulse rate, temperature, blood pressure, data generated by, for example, EKG, ECG and EEG, biorhythm monitors and other such information. The analysis can assess for example, chemical analytes, serum markers, antibodies, protein, nucleic acids and other such material obtained from the patient through a sample. Immunoassays are exemplified herein, but such exemplification is not intended to limit the intended scope of the disclosure, which is applicable to any test strip and test data read by an instrument, particularly a reflectance reader.
  • As used herein, patient historical data refers to data obtained from a patient, such as by questionnaire format, but typically does not include biochemical test data as used herein, except to the extent such data is historical, a desired solution is one that generates a number or result whereby a diagnosis of a disorder can be generated.
  • As used herein, a run is defined as a group of tests that include a at least one of a positive reference, positive control, negative control and any number of clinical samples within a 24 hr. period.
  • As used herein, symbology refers to a code, such as a bar code, that is engraved or imprinted on the test device. The symbology is any code known or designed by the user. The symbols are associated with information stored in a remote computer or memory or other such device or means. For example, each test device can be uniquely identified with an encoded symbology. It is contemplated herein that identifying and other information can be encoded in the bar code, which can be read by the reader when the test strip is read. Alternatively, the bar code or other symbology may be read by any of reading device known to those of skill in the art.
  • As used herein, a bar code is a symbology, typically a field of alternating dark bars and reflective spaces of varying widths, that is affixed onto or associated with an item and provides identifying information about the item. Bar codes can placed on a reflective background, and the contrast between the dark bars and reflective spaces, or the reflectivity ratio, allows an optical sensor in a reader to discern the transitions between the bars and spaces in the symbol. Bar codes are electro-optically scanned, typically using a laser or LED, and generate a signal that is transmitted to an associated computer whose memory has digitally stored therein identifying information associated with the item. The item is thereby automatically identified by its bar code and can be tracked, or additional information can be added to the stored information associated with the encoded item.
  • Several bar code formats are available and are used for different purposes. A number of different bar code symbologies exist, these symbologies include UPC/EAN codes, Code 39, Code 128, Codeabar, Interleaved 2 of 5 and many others; two-dimensional codes, such as PDF 417, Code 49, Code 16K; matrix codes (Data Code, Code 1, Vericod); graphic codes; and any others known to those of skill in the art. Preferred herein are one-dimensional codes, such as the well known Code 39 and Code 128, although two-dimensional codes (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,243,655 and 5,304,786, also are suitable for use herein.
  • The 39 bar code was developed in 1974 to provide a fully alphanumeric bar code for data entry systems. This bar code is especially effective in applications that use alphanumeric data for item identification. The structure of 39 permits it to be printed by a wide variety of techniques, including offset, letterpress, fully-formed impact printers, dot matrix printers, and on-impact printing devices.
  • Current application areas include inventory control, manufacturing work-in-process, tracking, wholesale distribution, hospitals, government agencies and retail point of sale. Code 39 is the most widely used alphanumeric bar code. It has been accepted as a standard code by many companies and industries. Specification ANSI Draft MH10.X-1981, entitled, “Specifications for Bar Code Symbols on Transport Packages & Unit Loads,” describes three different bar code symbologies. Code 39 is called 3-of-9 code in the ANSI specification. Moreover, the Depae MIL-STD-1189, dated Jan. 4, 1982, defines 39 (called 3 of 9 code) as the standard symbology for marking unit packs, outer containers, and selected documents.
  • Code 39 includes 9 bits, at least three of which are always 1. Code 39 can be used to encode a set of 43 characters, including upper case alphabetic and numeric (0-9) characters, as well as seven special characters (−, ., , *, $, /, + and %). The beginning and end characters are always an asterisk (*). The code uses narrow and wide bars along with narrow and wide spaces, and the encoding for a single character is made up of a pattern of bars and spaces. The code structure is three wide elements out of a total of nine elements, where an element is the area occupied by a bar or space). The nine elements include five bars and four spaces.
  • In Code 128, every character is constructed of eleven bars and spaces, and all 128 ASCII characters, i.e., numeric characters, upper and lower case characters, punctuation and control codes are encoded. There are three different character sets to select from: one set encodes all upper case characters and all ASCII control characters; another encodes all upper and lower case characters; and the third encodes all numeric characters. Through the use of special characters, it is possible to switch between character sets within a single code symbol. Code 128 uses four different bar and space widths. Each data character encoded in a Code 128 symbol is made up of 11 black or white modules. Three bars and three spaces are formed out of the 11 modules. There are 106 different three bar/three space combinations. Bars and spaces can vary between one and four modules wide. The stop character is made up of 13 modules. The symbol includes a quiet zone (10×-dimensions), a start character, the encoded data, a check character, the stop character and a trailing quiet zone (10×-dimensions) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,625).
  • Systems for generating and reading bar codes are readily available and are well known in the art.
  • Point of Care Diagnostic and Risk Assessment Systems
  • Provided herein are systems for use at the point of care for diagnosing and assessing certain medical risks. The systems are designed for use on site at the point of care, where patients are examined and tested, and for operation remote from the site.
  • The systems are designed to accept input in the form of patient data, including, but not limited to biochemical test data, physical test data, historical data and other such data, and to process and output information, preferably data relating to a medical diagnosis or a disease risk indicator. The patient data may be contained within the system, such as medical records or history, or may be input as a signal or image from a medical test or procedure, for example, immunoassay test data, blood pressure reading, ultrasound, X-ray or MRI, or introduced in any other form. Specific test data can be digitized, processed and input into the medical diagnosis expert system, where it may be integrated with other patient information. The output from the system is a disease risk index or medical diagnosis.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the system includes a reader, such as a reflectance or transmission reader, preferably a reflectance reader, for reading patient data, a test device designed to be read in the reader, and software for analysis of the data. In an exemplified embodiment of the system, the reader is the reflectance reader provided herein. A test strip device in a plastic housing designed for use with the reader, optionally including a symbology, such as an alphanumeric character bar code or other machine-readable code, and software designed for analysis of the data generated from the test strip also are provided.
  • Assays
  • Any assay is intended for use in the systems and methods herein. Such assays include, but are not limited to: nucleic acid detection, including using amplification and non-amplification protocols, any assay that relies on colorimetric or spectrometric detection, including fluorometric, luminescent detection, such as creatine, hemoglobin, lipids, ionic assays, blood chemistry. Any test that produces a signal, or from which a signal can be generated, that can be detected by a detector, such as a photodetector or a gamma counter, is intended for use as part of the systems provided herein. Any wavelength is intended to be included.
  • Immunoassays, including competitive and non-competitive immunoassays, are among those preferred for determination of the presence or amount of analyte in a patient sample, and are exemplified herein. It is understood that immunoassays are provided for exemplification, and that the methods and systems provided herein have broad applicability to patient test data and other test data.
  • A number of different types of immunoassays are well known using a variety of protocols and labels. Immunoassays may be homogeneous, i.e. performed in a single phase, or heterogeneous, where antigen or antibody is linked to an insoluble solid support upon which the assay is performed. Sandwich or competitive assays may be performed. The reaction steps may be performed simultaneously or sequentially. Threshold assays may be performed, where a predetermined amount of analyte is removed from the sample using a capture reagent before the assay is performed, and only analyte levels of above the specified concentration are detected. Assay formats include, but are not limited to, for example, assays performed in test tubes, wells or on immunochromatographic test strips, as well as dipstick, lateral flow or migratory format immunoassays.
  • Any known immunoassay procedure, particularly those that can be adapted for use in combination with lateral flow devices as described herein, can be used in the systems and methods provided herein.
  • Test Device
  • Any device which is compatible for use with a reader, preferably a reflectance reader, for determining the assay result is contemplated for use herein. Any such test strips that can be adapted for use in combination with a reader are contemplated for use in the systems provided herein. Such test strip devices as are known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,658,801, 5,656,502, 5,591,645, 5,500,375, 5,252,459, 5,132,097 and many other examples) may be used in systems as described herein, particularly in combination with the reader provided herein.
  • Typically these test devices are intended for use with biological samples, such as saliva, blood, serum, cerebral spinal fluid, cervico-vaginal samples, for example. Other biological samples, such as food samples, which are tested for contamination, such as by bacteria or insects, also are contemplated. Target analytes include, but are not limited to: nucleic acids, proteins, peptides, such as human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) antigens, antigens indicative of bacterial, such as Salmonella and E. coli, yeast or parasitic infections, apolipoprotein(a) and lipoprotein(a), environmental antigens, human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), E-3-G, interleukins and other cytokines and immunomodulatory proteins, such as IL-6 and interferon, small nuclear ribonuclear particles (snRNP) antigens, fFN and other indicators, such as IGF binding protein-1, of pregnancy related disorders.
  • Immunoassay Test Strip
  • A preferred embodiment is an immunoassay test strip that includes a membrane system that defines a liquid flow pathway. An exemplary immunoassay test strip provided herein is shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B. The test strip is described in detail in EXAMPLE 1. This test strip is provided for purposes of exemplification of the methods and systems provided herein and is not intended to limit the application to immunoassay test strip devices.
  • For performing immunoassays, lateral flow test immunoassay devices are among those preferred herein. In such devices, a membrane system forms a single fluid flow pathway along the test strip. The membrane system includes components that act as a solid support for immunoreactions. For example, porous or bibulous or absorbent materials may be placed on a strip such that they partially overlap, or a single material can be used, in order to conduct liquid along the strip. The membrane materials may be supported on a backing, such as a plastic backing. In a preferred embodiment, the test strip includes a glass fiber pad, a nitrocellulose strip and an absorbent cellulose paper strip supported on a plastic backing.
  • Antibodies that react with the target analyte and/or a detectable label system are immobilized on the solid support. The antibodies may be bound to the test strip by adsorption, ionic binding, van der Waals adsorption, electrostatic binding, or by covalent binding, by using a coupling agent, such as glutaraldehyde. For example, the antibodies may be applied to the conjugate pad and nitrocellulose strip using standard dispensing methods, such as a syringe pump, air brush, ceramic piston pump or drop-on-demand dispenser. In a preferred embodiment, a volumetric ceramic piston pump dispenser is used to stripe antibodies that bind the analyte of interest, including a labeled antibody conjugate, onto a glass fiber conjugate pad and a nitrocellulose strip.
  • The test strip may or may not be otherwise treated, for example, with sugar to facilitate mobility along the test strip or with water-soluble non-immune animal proteins, such as albumins, including bovine (BSA), other animal proteins, water-soluble polyamino acids, or casein to block non-specific binding sites.
  • Test Strip Housing
  • The test strip optionally may be contained within a housing for insertion into the reflectance reader. The housing may be made of plastic or other inert material that does not interfere with the assay procedure. An exemplary assay device, including a test strip and housing assembly is shown in FIGS. 2A-5.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the test strip housing includes a symbology, such as a bar code that can be associated with data related to the assay device, patient data and/or test run. For example, information associated with the device, such as lot number, expiration date, analyte and intensity value, or information related to the test run, such as date, reflectance value or other such information, can be encoded and associated, such as in a database with a bar code imprinted on the device. Any bar code system that provides the appropriate line thickness and spacing can be used. Code 39 and Code 128 are among the preferred bar code systems.
  • In a particular embodiment, Code 39 is used. An example bar code is shown in FIG. 25. The bar code is made up of 11 alphanumerics, including 2 alphabetic and 9 numeric characters. The first and last characters are asterisks (*), as is standard in the Code 39 system. The lot number is stored as 1 alpha and 4 numeric codes so that product complaints or questions can be traced to a particular lot number. In the exemplified embodiment, the first character represents the month of production, the second is a digit representing the year of production and the last three are an index value indicating the lot number. Thus, the lot number “A8001” represents the first device in a lot produced in January, 1998. The next two characters (“01”) represent the identity of the analyte as 2 numerics (00-99). This permits the use of up to 100 different analytes with the system. The reflectance intensity value (00-99) is stored as the next two numeric characters (“01”). The intensity value sets the reference threshold for which controls and patient samples can be compared. This eliminates the need to run liquid reference samples on a daily basis. FIGS. 2A, 2B and 3 depict assay devices that optionally include bar codes, 216 and 316, respectively. Finally, the cassette expiration date is stored as 1 alpha and 1 numeric code to prevent the use of expired devices. In the example given, an expiration code of “A9” represents an expiration date of January, 1999.
  • Antibodies
  • Any antibody, including polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies, or any fragment thereof, such as the Fab fragment, that binds the analyte of interest, is contemplated for use herein. Monoclonal and/or polyclonal antibodies may be used. For example, a mouse monoclonal anti-fetal fibronectin antibody may be used in a labeled antibody-conjugate for detecting fetal fibronectin, and a polyclonal goat anti-mouse antibody also may be used to bind fetal fibronectin to form a sandwich complex. An antibody that binds to the labeled antibody conjugate that is not complexed with fetal fibronectin may be immobilized on the test strip and used as a control antibody. For example, when fetal fibronectin is the analyte, a polyclonal goat anti-mouse IgG antibody may be used.
  • Conjugation of the Antibody to a Label
  • An antibody conjugate containing a detectable label may be used to bind the analyte of interest. The detectable label used in the antibody conjugate may be any physical or chemical label capable of being detected on a solid support using a reader, preferably a reflectance reader, and capable of being used to distinguish the reagents to be detected from other compounds and materials in the assay.
  • Suitable antibody labels are well known to those of skill in the art. The labels include, but are not limited to enzyme-substrate combinations that produce color upon reaction, colored particles, such as latex particles, colloidal metal or metal or carbon sol labels, fluorescent labels, and liposome or polymer sacs, which are detected due to aggregation of the label. A preferred label is a colored latex particle. In an alternative embodiment, colloidal gold is used in the labeled antibody conjugate.
  • The label may be derivatized for linking antibodies, such as by attaching functional groups, such as carboxyl groups to the surface of a particle to permit covalent attachment of antibodies. Antibodies may be conjugated to the label using well known coupling methods. Coupling agents such as glutaraldehyde or carbodiimide may be used. The labels may be bonded or coupled to the antibodies by chemical or physical bonding. In a preferred embodiment, a carbodiimide coupling reagent, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDAC), is used to link antibodies to latex particles.
  • Measurement of Analytes
  • Any analyte that can be detected in any assay, particularly calorimetric assays, including immunoassays, and that can be associated with a disorder is contemplated as a target herein. Suitable analytes are any which can be used, along with a specific binding partner, such as an antibody, or a competitor, such as an analog, in an assay. Analytes may include, but are not limited to proteins, haptens, immunoglobulins, enzymes, hormones (e.g., hCG, LH, E-3-G estrone-3-glucuronide and P-3-G (progestrone-3-glucuronide)), polynucleotides, steroids, lipoproteins, drugs, bacterial or viral antigens, such as Streptococcus, Neisseria and Chlamydia, lymphokines, cytokines, and the like. A number of suitable analytes are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,686,315, which is incorporated herein by reference. Although examples are provided for the determination of fetal fibronectin in cervicovaginal samples, the systems and methods provided herein are not limited to the detection and measurement of fetal fibronectin, but apply to any biochemical test, particularly those for which test strips can be developed or for which test strips are known.
  • Measurement of Fetal Fibronectin
  • In an exemplary embodiment, the system is used for diagnosing or predicting conditions such as pregnancy, including ectopic pregnancy, pre-eclampsia, preterm labor or imminent delivery and fetal membrane rupture. Fetal fibronectin is a fetal restricted antigen found in placenta, amniotic fluid and fetal connective tissue. Since fetal fibronectin is strictly associated with pregnancy, determination of the presence of fetal fibronectin in a cervicovaginal sample is a highly reliable early indication of pregnancy. Also, the absence of a fetal restricted antigen in a cervicovaginal sample during the first 20 weeks of pregnancy is an indicator of ectopic pregnancy. Ectopic pregnancies, which are a major cause of mortality for women, are not readily distinguished from normal pregnancies using standard pregnancy determination methods and tests. Determination of impending preterm births is critical for increasing neonatal survival of preterm infants. The presence of fetal fibronectin (fFN) in cervicovaginal secretion samples in patients after week 12 of pregnancy is associated with a risk of impending delivery, including spontaneous abortions (12-20 weeks), preterm delivery (20-37 weeks), term (37-40 weeks) and post-date delivery (after 40 weeks), in pregnant women. In addition, the presence of fetal fibronectin in a cervicovaginal sample provides a method for determining increased risk of labor and fetal membrane rupture after week 20 of pregnancy. Detection of rupture of the amniotic membrane is important in distinguishing true and false labor, and when the rupture is small and the volume of amniotic liquid escaping is small, the rupture is often undetected. The methods and systems herein provide a means to reliably assess the risk for any of these conditions. An immunoassay procedure for detecting fetal fibronectin is described in EXAMPLE 2.
  • Test Strip for Measuring fFN and Cellular Fibronectin
  • Methods for measuring fetal fibronectin and cellular fibronectin levels in cervicovaginal samples are known (see, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,096,830, 5,185,270, 5,223,440, 5,236,846, 5,281,522, 5,468,619 and 5,516,702, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety), and diagnostic tests for various pregnancy-related disorders are available (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,096,830, 5,079,171). These methods can be adapted for use with the immunoassay test strips and devices described herein. In particular, an immunoassay test strip for measuring fFN in cervicovaginal samples is provided.
  • Antibodies for Fetal Fibronectin
  • An antibody that will bind the analyte of interest is conjugated to a detectable label. In a particular embodiment, where fetal fibronectin is to be detected, a mouse monoclonal anti-fFN antibody (see, U.S. Pat. No. 5,281,522), conjugated to latex particles containing a blue dye may be used. In an alternative embodiment, a goat polyclonal antibody to human fibronectin is conjugated to a colloidal gold label.
  • In a preferred embodiment, an antibody that binds the labeled antibody conjugate that is not complexed with fetal fibronectin is used as a control antibody. For example, where the labeled conjugate includes a monoclonal anti-fetal fibronectin antibody, a polyclonal goat anti-mouse IgG antibody is used.
  • The antibodies may be raised and purified using methods known to those of skill in the art or obtained from publicly available sources. For example, monoclonal antibody FDC-6 (deposited at the American Type Culture Collection as accession number ATCC HB 9018; see U.S. Pat. No. 4,894,326; see, also, Matsuura et al. (1985) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 82:6517-6521; see, also, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,919,889, 5,096,830, 5,185,270, 5,223,440, 5,236,846, 5,281,522, 5,468,619 and 5,516,702), which is raised against whole molecule onco-fetal fibronectin from a tumor cell line, may be used.
  • Fetal Fibronectin Assay Procedure
  • In conducting the assay, a patient sample is obtained. The sample may include fluid and particulate solids, and, thus, can be filtered prior to application to the assay test strip. The sample may be removed from the patient using a swab having a fibrous tip, an aspirator, suction or lavage device, syringe, or any other known method of removing a bodily sample, including passive methods for collecting urine or saliva. In particular, the sample may be extracted into a buffer solution, and optionally heated, for example, at 37° C. and filtered. In a preferred embodiment, where fetal fibronectin is to be detected in a sample, the sample is obtained from in the vicinity of the posterior formix, the ectocervix or external cervical os using a swab having a dacron or other fibrous tip.
  • A volume of the test sample is then delivered to the test strip (FIGS. 1A and 1B) using any known means for transporting a biological sample, for example, a standard plastic pipet. Any analyte in the sample binds to the labeled antibody and the resulting complex migrates along the test strip. Alternatively, the sample may be pre-mixed with the labeled conjugate prior to applying the mixture to the test strip. When the labeled antibody-analyte complex encounters a detection zone of the test strip, the immobilized antibody therein binds the complex to form a sandwich complex, thereby forming a colored stripe.
  • Any unbound latex-conjugated antibody continues to migrate into a control zone where it is captured by a second immobilized antibody or other agent capable of binding the conjugate, and thereby forms a second colored stripe due to the aggregation of the dye-containing latex beads. This indicates that the assay run has completed.
  • The results of the assay are assessed using the reader and software provided herein. The rapid test herein provides, at the very least, the same clinically relevant information as a fFN ELISA (an enzyme linked immunosorbent sandwich assay (ELISA) see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,281,522) test heretofore available, but in significantly less time and at the point of care. This rapid fFN immunoassay allows the user to test a cervicovaginal swab sample in about 20 minutes. When comparing the 20 minute rapid fFN test to the data from the fFN ELISA, a Kappa coefficient of 0.68 was found with a 95% confidence interval [0.62, 0.76] and an overall concordance of at least about 91.6%. These data were obtained using a system including an immunoassay test strip in combination with a reflectance reader and data processing software employing data reduction and curve fitting algorithms or neural networks, as described herein. Thus, the systems herein provide results that are at the very least comparable to the ELISA, but generally are superior and more informative.
  • Reader
  • Reflectance and other readers, including densitometers and transmittance readers, are known to those of skill in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,598,007, 5,132,097, 5,094,955, 4,267,261, 5,118,183, 5,661,563, 4,647,544, 4,197,088, 4,666,309, 5,457,313, 3,905,767, 5,198,369, 4,400,353). Any reader that upon combination with appropriate software, as described herein, can be used to detect images and digitize images, such as symbologies, particularly bar codes or the lines and stripes produced on chromatographic immunoassay devices or on gels or photographic images thereof, such as the lines on DNA and RNA sequencing gels, X-rays, electrocardiograms, and other such data, is intended for use herein.
  • The reader provided herein, particularly in combination with the software provided herein, is preferred for use in the point of care diagnostic systems.
  • In an exemplified embodiment, a sample is applied to a diagnostic immunoassay test strip, and colored or dark bands are produced. The intensity of the color reflected by the colored label in the test region (or detection zone) of the test strip is, for concentration ranges of interest, directly proportional or otherwise correlated with an amount of analyte present in the sample being tested.
  • The color intensity produced is read, in accordance with the present embodiment, using a reader device, for example, a reflectance reader, adapted to read the test strip. The intensity of the color reflected by the colored label in the test region (or detection zone) of the test strip is directly proportional to the amount of analyte present in the sample being tested. In other words, a darker colored line in the test region indicates a greater amount of analyte, whereas a lighter colored line in the test region indicates a smaller amount of analyte. In accordance with the present embodiment, the color intensity produced, i.e., the darkness or lightness of the colored line, is read using a reader device, for example, a reflectance reader, adapted to read the test strip. A reflectance measurement obtained by the reader device is, in accordance with the present embodiment, correlated to the presence and/or quantity of analyte present in the sample as described hereinbelow. The reader takes a plurality of readings along the strip, and obtains data that are used to generate results that are an indication of the presence and/or quantity of analyte present in the sample as described hereinbelow. The system also correlates such data with the presence of a disorder, condition or risk thereof.
  • Optionally, in addition to reading the test strip, the reader may be adapted to read a symbology, such as a bar code, which is present on the test strip or housing and encodes information relating to the test strip device and/or test result and/or patient, and/or reagent or other desired information. Typically the associated information is stored in a remote computer database, but can be manually stored. In other embodiments, the symbology can be imprinted when the device is used and the information encoded therein.
  • Referring to FIG. 6, an exemplary embodiment of the reader device 600 is shown with an immunoassay device 200, as shown in FIG. 2A, inserted into a cassette slot 602 therein. The cassette slot 602 is adapted to receive the immunoassay device 200, and a reader head assembly (not shown) supported within the reader device 600 is adapted to read the immunoassay test strip, and optionally a symbology, exemplified as a bar code, with the immunoassay device. Such reading is performed by scanning a reader head (not shown) across the device, including a test window 214 in the immunoassay device 200 and a symbology, such as the exemplified bar code 216, if present, and in the process directing light onto the bar code and/or a test portion and a control portion of the immunoassay test strip. An amount of such light reflected back from the bar code and/or the test portion and control portion of the immunoassay test strip is measured as the reader head scans across the device.
  • Also shown are a data entry keypad 604, including ten digit keys (also labeled with letters of the alphabet, such as is commonly the case on telephone keypads), a delete key, a space key, an escape key, a print key, enter key, and up, down, left and right arrow keys, additional characters such as , or . or /, and any others desired by the user. The data entry keypad 604 can be used by an operator of the reader device 600 to input identification information, to enter control test parameters, to initiate and terminate testing, and the like. A processing unit (not shown) housed within the reader device 600 is responsive to the keypad and performs data analysis functions, as described hereinbelow, in accordance with modifications made to a processor in the processing unit by an appropriate software subsystem.
  • Also shown in FIG. 6 is a liquid crystal display screen 606. The liquid crystal display screen 606 receives output data from the processing unit and displays it to an operator of the reader device 600, including displaying results of tests, error messages, instructions, troubleshooting information, and the like.
  • Referring next to FIG. 7, a perspective view of a lower housing 702 of one embodiment of an immunoassay reader device 600 of FIG. 6 is shown with a reader head assembly 704 located therein and the immunoassay device 200 inserted into the cassette slot 602 at a front edge of the lower housing 702. The cassette slot 602 located at the front edge of the lower housing 702 provides an aperture through which the immunoassay device 200 is inserted into and guided into the reader device 600 in order measure light reflected from an immunoassay test strip. In some embodiments of the reader, the reader is adapted to additionally read a symbology, such as a bar code, imprinted, engraved on or otherwise affixed to the test strip or device.
  • When the immunoassay device 200 is inserted into the cassette slot 602 of the lower housing, a reader head 706 on the reader head assembly 704 is positioned directly above the device 200, such that the longitudinal (or major) axes of optical fibers within the reader head 706 are normal to a surface of the device, including the test strip and optionally a symbology that is imprinted, engraved or other wise affixed on the device.
  • Alternatively, the reader head 706 may be fixed, at least rotationally, and the immunoassay device 200 may be moved into position after insertion into the cassette slot 602, such that the longitudinal (or major) axes of optical fibers within the reader head 706 are normal to a surface of the device to be read by the reader.
  • Referring next to FIG. 8, a top view is shown of the lower housing 702, the immunoassay device 200, the cassette slot 602, and a stepper motor 802. As can be seen, after insertion into the lower housing 702, the immunoassay device 200 is positioned in alignment with the stepper motor 802, which is part of the reader head assembly. The stepper motor is used to scan the reader head 706 across the symbology, such as the exemplified bar code 216 and/or test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200.
  • One embodiment of the reader device is shown in FIG. 9. Shown are the lower housing 702, the immunoassay device 200, the stepper motor 802, an actuator wheel 902, the reader head 706, and linkages for moving the reader head 706 parallel to a major axis of the immunoassay device 200 in order to scan the reader head 706 across the symbology (bar code) 216 and/or test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200.
  • To read the immunoassay test strip, the reader head is brought within a uniform distance of about 0.010 inches from the test strip. When the immunoassay device 200 is slid into the cassette slot 602, the actuator wheel 902 and an actuator spring (not shown) work together to bring the reader head 706 down to within about 0.010 inches of the immunoassay test strip within the housing 202 of the immunoassay device 200. In order to move the reader head 706 into position within 0.010 inches of the immunoassay test strip, the reader head 706 is pivoted along with a portion of the reader head assembly. Prior to being brought into position within 0.010 inches of the immunoassay test strip, while the immunoassay device 200 is being inserted into or removed from the immunoassay reader device 600, the reader head 706 assumes a retracted position, i.e., raised position, so that the immunoassay device 200 can be inserted into or removed from the immunoassay reader device 600 without crashing the reader head 706 into the immunoassay device 200.
  • When the immunoassay device 200 is inserted into the cassette slot 602, it contacts the actuator wheel 902 and causes a carriage assembly of the reader head assembly to be brought down from the retracted position so that the reader head 706 is within 0.010 inches of the immunoassay test strip.
  • Insertion of the immunoassay device 200 causes the actuator wheel to pop-up by applying pressure to the actuator spring, bringing the carriage assembly down from the retracted position.
  • The immunoassay device 200 is pushed into the cassette slot 602 until it meets a stop. Once inserted, the immunoassay device 200, the actuator wheel 902, and the actuator spring remain fixed in position, while the reader head 706 is stepped across the test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200 by the stepper motor 802. In other words, only the reader head 706 moves during the scanning of the immunoassay test strip.
  • Alternatively, the immunoassay device 200 is pushed into the cassette slot 602 until it meets the stop. Once inserted the immunoassay device 200 may be rotated up to within 0.010 inches of the reader head 706 by gently lifting the immunoassay device 200. By gently lifting the immunoassay device 200, a base of the reader head assembly is pivoted up toward the carriage assembly and the reader head 706, positioning the immunoassay test strip within 0.010 inches of the reader head 706. Then the reader head 706 is then stepped across the test window 214 of the immunoassay test strip by the stepper motor 802. In other words, in accordance with this alternative, only the reader head 706 moves during the scanning of the immunoassay test strip and, the reader head 706 moves only during the scanning of the immunoassay test strip.
  • Prior to insertion of the immunoassay device 200 into the cassette slot 602, and prior to scanning, the reader head 706 is positioned at a point that would place it approximately half way across (in the middle of) the test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200. After insertion of the device 200 into the reader 600, when an operator depresses a scan key on the key pad (see FIG. 6), the reader head 706 is moved from this position toward the stepper motor 802 until a microswitch is activated. Once the microswitch is activated, the reader head 706 is said to be in a “home” position from which scanning of the test strip commences. Once scanning commences, the reader head 706 advances from the home position across the test window 214. Thus, the reader head 706 scans in a direction moving away from the stepper motor toward the cassette slot 602 or to the left as depicted in FIG. 9. Total travel of the reader head 706 during scanning of the immunoassay test strip is 0.452 inches, which is achieved in 0.002 inch steps, which are 226 in number. One set of readings is taken per step, with each set of readings including a dark reading, a first light reading and a second light reading.
  • Referring next to FIG. 10, the reader head assembly 1000 is shown. Shown are the actuator spring 1002, the actuator 1004, the base 1006, the stepper motor 802, the actuator wheel 902, a rotor arm 1008, and the reader head 706. Also shown is a pivot point 1010 on which the carriage assembly 1012, including the reader head 706, stepper motor 802, actuator wheel 902, actuator spring, 1002, and rotor arm 1008 pivot to assume a raised position for insertion and removal of the immunoassay device 200 from the reader device 600 and to assume a lowered position for scanning the reader head 706 across the test window 214 of the immunoassay device 200.
  • Referring next to FIG. 11, shown is a side view of the reader head 706 of the reader head assembly of FIG. 10. Shown is a first light emitting diode (LED) 1102, a second light emitting diode (LED) 1104, a photodetector 1106, a reader head aperture 1108, and mounting holes 1110.
  • Referring next to FIG. 12 a reverse angle side view is shown of the reader head assembly 1000 of FIG. 10. Shown are the stepper motor 802, the base 1006, mounting holes 1202, and a mounting bracket 1204 on which the reader head 706 is mounted.
  • Referring next to FIG. 13 a reverse angle side view of the reader head 706 of FIG. 11 is shown. Seen are the mounting holes 1110, and the reader head aperture 1108.
  • Referring next to FIG. 14, shown is a side view of the reader head assembly 1000 of FIG. 10 having assumed a retracted position. Shown are the actuator spring 1002, the actuator arm 1004, the stepper motor 802, the reader head 706, the reader head supporting bracket 1204, the pivot 1010 on which such elements rotate, and a base 1006 relative to which such elements rotate.
  • As can be seen, the actuator arm 1004, the actuator spring 1002, the stepper motor 802, the reader head 706, the reader head mounting bracket 1204, and mechanisms used for supporting and scanning the reader head 706 are designed so that the test strip 100 in the device 200 is positioned within 0.010 inches of the aperture 1108 of the reader head. Any design suitable to effect such can be employed with the present embodiment.
  • In the example illustrated, the actuator arm 1004, the actuator spring 1002, the stepper motor 802, the reader head 706, the reader head mounting bracket 1204, and the mechanisms used for supporting and scanning the reader head 706 are shown rotated on the pivot 1010 such as would be the case, in accordance with the variation shown, when the immunoassay device 200 has been removed from the reader device 600 and/or as the immunoassay device 200 is being inserted into or removed from the reader device 600.
  • Referring next to FIG. 15, a side view is shown of the reader head 706 of FIG. 11. Shown are the aperture 1108 and the first light emitting diode 1102.
  • Referring next to FIG. 16, an end view is shown of the reader head assembly 1000 of FIG. 10. Shown is the stepper motor 802, the base 1006, and the actuator arm 1004.
  • In alternative embodiments, the reader is adapted to read a symbology, such as a bar code. An exemplary embodiment of a reader so-adapted is shown in FIG. 24. In this embodiment, when the device cassette 2402 is inserted into the reader, it sits on a spring stage 2404. Prior to insertion of the device 300 (as shown in FIG. 2B) into the cassette slot 602, and prior to scanning, the reader head 2406 is positioned at a point that would place it approximately 0.125 inches from the forward edge of the device as it is inserted into the reader.
  • As shown in FIG. 2B, the device includes guide ridges 318 on either side of the bar code along the outer edges of the upper surface of the device. The reader head 2406 is moved by the shaft 2408 of the stepper motor 2414 and scans in a direction moving away from the stepper motor toward the cassette slot 2412. As the reader head 2406 moves along the device above the bar code 2410, the guide ridges 2412 contact the reader head assembly and act to compress the spring stage 2404 by 3° in order maintain the reader head 2406 at a distance of 0.010 inches above the bar code 2410 as the bar code 2410 is read. After the bar code 2410 is read, the reader head assembly 2406 moves off the guide ridges 2412, the spring stage 2404 returns to a level position (0°), and the reader head 2406 is repositioned at a distance of 0.010 inches in order to read the test strip. When reading a symbology, such as a bar code, the reader is moved in steps of approximately between 0.002-0.008 inches at a scan resolution of approximately 125-500 steps per inch, preferably about 250 steps per inch. One set of readings is taken per step, with each set of readings including a dark reading, a first light reading and a second light reading.
  • Regardless of whether one of these alternatives is used, or whether any of numerous variations thereof or any of numerous other possible embodiments well within the abilities of the skilled artisan to easily produce is used in order to position the reader head within a prescribed distance, e.g., 0.010 inches, of the test strip symbology, such as a bar code, a suitable mechanism is preferably employed to effect such positioning.
  • Referring next to FIG. 17, shown is a side view partially in cross-section of an exemplary embodiment of the reader head. Shown are a first light emitting diode 1102, a second light emitting diode 1104 and a photodetector 1106. Also shown is an aperture 1108 and the mounting holes 1110. Shown coupled between each of the LED's 1102, 1104 and the aperture 1108 are first and second fiberoptic bundles 1702, 1704. Similarly, a third fiberoptic bundle 1706 is shown coupled between the aperture 1108 and the photodetector 1106. The first and second fiberoptic bundles 1702, 1704 conduct light from the first and second LED's 1102, 1104, respectively, to the aperture 1108. The third fiberoptic bundle 1706 conducts light from the aperture 1108 to the photodetector 1106. In response to such light, the photodetector generates a reflection signal, e.g., a voltage indicative of an amount of reflected light. The electrical signal can be then processed and converted to a digital signal by using any method commonly known to those of skill in the art.
  • Referring next to FIG. 18, shown is a closeup partial cross-sectional view of the aperture 1108 of FIG. 17. Also shown are individual fiberoptic fibers 1802, 1804, 1806 of the fiberoptic bundles 1702, 1704, 1706 of FIG. 17, positioned within the aperture 1108 so as to transmit light 1808 from the aperture 1108 onto the symbology (exemplified bar code) and/or test strip 100 and to receive reflected light 1808 from the bar code and/or test strip 100 entering the aperture 1108. (The transmitted and reflected light 1808 is represented with an arrow.) As can be seen, a gap 1810 between the aperture 1108 and the bar code and/or test strip 100 is present. The gap 1810 preferably has a width of approximately 0.010 inches, which is maintained as the reader head 706 is scanned across the bar code and/or test window 214 of the test strip 200.
  • Referring next to FIG. 19, a bottom view is shown of individual fiberoptic fiber ends 1902, 1904, 1906 positioned in the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706 of FIG. 10 so as to maximize the distribution of light emitted from individual fiberoptic fibers (fiberoptic conductors), and furthermore to maximize the uniformity of light received into individual fiberoptic conductors. Indicated using diagonal cross-hatching angled from lower left to upper right are individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 of the first fiberoptic bundle 1702. These individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1902 carry light emitted from the first light emitting diode from the first fiberoptic bundle through the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706. Similarly, indicated with cross-hatching from an upper left to lower right are fiberoptic conductor ends 1904 of the second fiberoptic bundle 1704. These individual fiberoptic conductor ends carry light emitted from the second light emitting diode to the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706. Without cross-hatching are shown individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1906 of the third fiberoptic bundle 1706. The third fiberoptic bundle 1706 carries light entering the aperture 1108 to the photodetector.
  • By employing the particularly advantageous arrangement of the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 at the aperture 1108, uniform distribution emissions and light reception is achieved. Such arrangement is said to be a “sigmoidal” (S-like or serpentine) arrangement or a “sigmoidal” distribution. It is an important feature of the present embodiment that the fiberoptic fibers in each of the three groups are arranged along with fiberoptic fibers from the remaining groups in a sigmoidal-like (or “S”-like) pattern with three columns of thirteen fiberoptic fibers each. An arrangement that achieves this feature is intended herein.
  • In order to achieve the sigmoidal arrangement of fiberoptic conductor ends shown, 39 fiberoptic conductors are positioned within the aperture 1108. Next, a clamp assembly made up of a “U”-shaped channel, and an “I”-shaped clamp positioned at the open side of the “U” is employed. The fiberoptic conductors, portions of which protrude from the aperture 1108 are placed between the “U”-shaped channel and the “I”-shaped clamp and a compressive force is applied thereto by the “I”-shaped clamp, holding the protruding portions of the fiberoptic conductors firmly in position. A resin is then poured into the reader head 706 so as to become interposed between and around the fiberoptic conductors at the aperture 1108. Once the resin is set, the clamp assembly is removed, and the protruding portions of the fiberoptic conductors are trimmed back flush with the aperture 1108, so as to define a planar surface of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 at the aperture 1108. This planar surface is held parallel to a plane at an upper surface of the immunoassay test strip 100 during scanning of the immunoassay test strip.
  • Advantageously, by creating this planar surface of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906, the associated fiberoptic conductors of which all of which have longitudinal axes that are substantially parallel to one another and normal to the plane defined by the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906. As a result, very efficient transfer of light to and from the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 is achieved.
  • Once the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 are set in the resin, and trimmed, as described above, in individual fiberoptic conductors are tested by projecting light individually through the fiberoptic conductors toward the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906, to locate the fiberoptic conductor end associated with the particular fiberoptic conductor being tested. This determination is made by observing which of the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 “lights up” when light is transmitted down the particular fiberoptic conductor. As fiberoptic conductors associated with the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 are identified, the fiberoptic conductors are assigned to one of the first, second, and third fiberoptic bundles, so as to achieve, for example, the sigmoidal distribution of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 illustrated in FIG. 19.
  • Advantageously, by effecting the sigmoidal distribution of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 associated with fiberoptic conductors of each of the first, second, and third fiberoptic bundles, a uniform distribution of light emitted from the aperture 1108, and a uniform distribution of light reflected back to the aperture 1108 is achieved.
  • Referring next to FIG. 20, a cross-sectional view of a first fiberoptic bundle 1702 is shown with individual fiberoptic elements 2002 selected to effect the sigmoidal distribution of FIG. 19. As can be seen, 13 individual fiberoptic elements are present in the fiberoptic bundle 1702, which is the same number of fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 depicted in FIG. 19 for each of the three fiberoptic bundles 1702, 1704, 1706. The fiberoptic bundle 1702 shown in FIG. 17 carries the light from the first light emitting diode to the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706. Cross-sectional views of the second and third fiberoptic bundles are similar to that shown in FIG. 20.
  • Referring next to FIGS. 21, 22 and 23, three schematic views are shown illustrating a process for reading test results from immunoassay test strip 100 with the control region 2102 and the detection region 2104 depicted thereon. In the example shown, blue latex particles are detected in the test region and the control region on a nitrocellulose support. Also depicted are the aperture 1108 of the reader head 706 in a dark reading mode (FIG. 21), a first light reading mode (FIG. 22) and a second light reading mode (FIG. 23).
  • The reader head assembly (described above) includes the first light-emitting diode (which in the present example is a blue LED), the second LED (which in the present example is an amber LED), a silicon photodiode detector, and fiberoptic fibers arranged with fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 in the sigmoidal distribution in the aperture 1108 (0.002 inches wide), which is located at the bottom (or tip) of the reader head 706 at a point nearest the immunoassay test strip, when the immunoassay device is inserted into the immunoassay reader device. It is understood that the selection of LEDs will be dependent upon the signal produced in the test; all detectable electromagnetic wavelengths, preferably visible light, are contemplated herein. Fluorescence and other such labeling means also are contemplated herein.
  • The blue LED and the amber LED emit light of specified wavelengths (λ1 and λ2, respectively). It should be understood that any suitable wavelengths may be selected. Such selection is dependent on the particular assay with which the immunoassay reader device is being employed. The wavelengths selected are selected so as to allow removal of effects of the background of the immunoassay test strip or symbology, e.g., bar code, from the reflectance readings, and to optimize a reading of a reduction in reflectance associated with accumulated label at the reaction regions of the immunoassay test strip.
  • In a preferred embodiment, where blue latex particles are detected on a nitrocellulose support, light having a wavelength of 430 nm (blue) is emitted from the first light emitting diode (LED1), i.e., the blue LED, into the first fiberoptic bundle 1702. The same wavelengths can be used to read a symbology, such as a bar code, associated with the assay device. The first fiberoptic bundle 1702 transmits blue light to the aperture 1108 in the reader head 706 where it is emitted at an orientation normal to a plane at the upper surface of the symbology (exemplified bar code) or test strip. A second light emitting diode (LED2), i.e., the amber LED, emits light with a wavelength of 595 nm (amber) into a second fiberoptic bundle 1704. The second fiberoptic bundle 1704 transmits the amber light to the aperture in the reader head 706 where it is emitted at an orientation normal to the plane at the upper surface of the bar code or test strip.
  • At the aperture, individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904 of the first and second fiberoptic bundles 1702, 1704, along with individual fiberoptic conductor ends 1906 from the third fiberoptic bundle 1706 are arranged in three groups of thirteen optical fibers each: the first group from the first fiberoptic bundle 1702, which transmits light emitted by the blue LED to the aperture 1108; the second group from the second fiberoptic bundle 1704, which transmits light emitted by the amber LED to the aperture 1108; and the third group, which transmits reflected light received at the aperture 1108 through the third fiberoptic bundle 1706 to the photodetector. The thirty-nine fibers (thirteen in each of three groups) each include respective fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 arranged in the sigmoidal distribution (or pattern) (see FIG. 19) at the aperture 1108 such that the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 are co-planar at the aperture and in the plane parallel to the plane at the upper surface of the bar code or test strip, when the reader head 706 is positioned to take measurements from the bar code or test strip 100.
  • At the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906, each fiberoptic fiber (or conductor) has a longitudinal axis that is normal to the plane at the upper surface of the bar code or test strip. As a result, light emitted from the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 is directed in a direction substantially normal to this surface plane. The fiberoptic fibers in each of the three groups are arranged along with fiberoptic fibers from the remaining groups in a sigmoidal (or “S”-like) pattern with three columns of thirteen fibers each.
  • When the immunoassay device is inserted into the cassette slot at the front of the immunoassay reader device 600, the reader head 706 is positioned directly over the bar code or test opening of the assay device such that the longitudinal axes of the optical fibers at their ends 1902, 1904, 1906 at the aperture, are normal to a plane at the surface of the immunoassay test strip and the ends 1902, 1904, 1906 of the fibers at a distance of about 0.010 inches. Light from the first LED and the second LED is transmitted by the fibers onto the bar code or assay test strip at an angle normal to the upper surface of the immunoassay device, and light is reflected normally back from the strip to the ends 1902, 1904, 1906. This reflected light is transmitted by the fibers of the third fiberoptic bundle to the photodetector.
  • The reader head 706 takes three separate reflectance readings (FIGS. 21, 22 and 23, respectively) from each position at which it reads of the immunoassay test strip. Such measurements are made by reading an output of the photodetector (which is a voltage) while controlling the first and second LED's.
  • The first reading is used to determine an amount of ambient (or background) light leaking into the immunoassay device (e.g., light leaking through the cassette slot entrance, or light reflected/transmitted into the reader through the housing of the immunoassay device, which may be, for example, white plastic. The first reading is a “dark” reading taken with the blue LED and the amber LED both turned off. This dark reading (which is a voltage at the photodetector) is digitized in a conventional manner using an analog to digital converter, and may be subtracted by the processing unit from other “light” readings made in response to blue LED illumination and amber LED illumination so as to correct for this light leakage.
  • The second reading, used to determine levels of light reflections associated with the background of the bar code or the assay test strip itself, is taken with the blue LED pulsed on and the amber LED turned off.
  • The third reading, used to detect the bar code or the presence of the label on the assay test strip is taken with the amber LED pulsed on and the blue LED turned off.
  • A control circuit (including the processing unit, which includes a processor, such as a microprocessor) receives the digitized output of the photodetector for all three readings, controls the on and off operation of the blue LED and the amber LED, controls when photodetection readings are taken, and controls the position of the reader head 706 by controlling the stepper motor. A memory circuit stores raw and/or processed data (i.e., readings from the photodetector). The data also may be displayed to the operator via the LCD display of the immunoassay reader device 600.
  • After being positioned above the housing, the reader head 706 is moved (scanned) across the bar code and/or test strip by the stepper motor under the control of the control circuit to allow the reader head 706 to scan the exposed surface of the bar code and/or assay test strip (including the detection and control zones through the test window 214 in the immunoassay device). As stated above, in a preferred embodiment, the distance between reader head 706 and the bar code or assay test strip 200 is approximately 0.010.″
  • The reader head 706 is slidably connected to a rail (e.g., guide rods), and is coupled to a worm or screw gear driven by the stepper motor.
  • Under the control of the control circuit, the stepper motor drives the reader head 706 along the rail in small steps. At each step, the control circuit takes the three readings described above (“dark”, blue LED illuminated, amber LED illuminated). The control circuit moves the reader head 706 such that the fiberoptic conductor ends 1902, 1904, 1906 pass directly above and normal to the exposed surface of the bar code and/or test strip in a sequence of small steps. As explained above, during each step a sequence of “dark”, blue LED and amber LED readings are taken and recorded.
  • The raw data read from the photodetector is then processed by the control circuit to discern the symbology, such as a bar code pattern, in order to provide information regarding the assay device and/or test run and/or reagents, and/or patient and/or to read the test strip to determine the presence or concentration of analyte in the sample.
  • In a preferred embodiment, when reading the test strip, since the detection and control latex stripes are each about 0.020″ wide, and since each step of the sensing head is about 0.002″ long, there will be about 10 steps within each stripe, i.e., within the test region and the control region. Thus, there will be 10 sets of three readings (i.e., dark, blue LED and amber LED) at the test region and 10 sets of three readings (i.e., dark, blue LED and amber LED) at the control region. The remainder of the reading sets will not be made over either the test region or the control region.
  • In a preferred embodiment, when the assay device is inserted into the cassette slot of the reader device 600, the reader head 706 is positioned over the bar code or test strip, and the control circuit then moves the head to an initial (or home) position. The control circuit moves (scans) the head across the exposed surface of the bar code or test strip, including the test region and the control region of the strip, in small increments. At each step, the control circuit takes the first reading (FIG. 21) of the photodetector output with the blue LED and the amber LED, both off, takes the second reading (FIG. 22) with the blue LED pulsed on and the amber LED off, and takes a third reading (FIG. 23) with the blue LED off and the amber LED pulsed on. The control circuit then steps the reader head 706 by controlling the stepper motor and repeats the three readings at its new location. For the test strip, this process is repeated for each of 226 steps (0.452″ at 0.002″/step) until the surface of the assay test strip is read. Where a bar code is read, the length of the bar code is typically approximately 1 inch in length, and a step size of approximately 0.002-0.008 inches are used; thus between approximately 125-500 steps are performed.
  • The raw reflectance data is then analyzed by the control circuit in accordance with appropriate software control to identify the symbology, such as a bar code or determine the presence or concentration of the analyte in the sample. Where the reader is used to read a bar code associated with the test device, the data collected from the bar code are transformed into integrated peak information and analyzed as alphanumeric characters to provide information about the assay device and/or test run. Where the reader is used to detect an analyte, the data collected from the test strip are compared to a threshold or reference reflectance value to determine the presence or concentration of the analyte. The output can be displayed via an operator interface, or can be output to another computer or apparatus.
  • Data Analysis and Decision Support Systems
  • The systems herein include software for data analysis. Data analysis includes any algorithms or methodology for obtaining diagnostically relevant information from the raw data. Simple algorithms as well as decision-support systems, particularly neural networks are contemplated herein.
  • In particular embodiments, the data analysis methodology includes, some or all of the following steps: (1) optionally correcting the reflectance readings to correct for light leakage; (2) reducing the raw reflectance data by using a ratiometric formula; (3) generating an image of the test data by plotting the reduced data; (4) expressing this image as a polynomial mathematical function, for example, by using a combination of a flat or parabolic image to represent the baseline and two gaussian curves to represent the peaks; (5) using a curve-fitting algorithm to generate parameters to define the image; (6) optimizing the reconstruction of the image and producing a fitted image; (7) comparing the scanned image and fitted image by solving the linear regression through the curves; (8) validating the parameters obtained from the curve-fitting and the peak heights obtained; and (9) classifying the validated result as positive or negative by comparing peak heights of a clinical sample to reference samples. The method may further include: (10) using the test result with other patient information in a decision-support system to generate a medical diagnosis or risk assessment.
  • In alternative embodiments, the parameters used to define the image, as in (5) above, and to classify the sample, as in (9) above, can be generated using trained neural networks.
  • Data Reduction
  • In an exemplary embodiment, the raw reflectance data obtained from the instrument are stored as an array of points containing a number of rows (n) corresponding to the number of points at which readings were taken along the test strip, and a number of columns (m) corresponding to the reflectance readings taken at each point, including background or dark readings and readings at different wavelengths. If necessary, the reflectance readings are processed by first subtracting the dark reading taken at the corresponding step to correct for light leakage, which typically is negligible. The corrected reflectance readings are then input into a ratiometric algorithm, which removes noise from the membrane and normalizes data between test strips:
    f(y)=[(R λ1 /R max/λ1 *R max/λ2 /R λ2)].
  • The algorithm is based upon the ratio of readings at the different wavelengths and calculates a reduced data set (1×n), which is used to generate a curve from the original reflectance data. In processing the data, a new column of reduced data is generated by using the ratiometric formula.
  • When reading an assay test strip, as described above, the size of the matrix is 4×226, where 4 is the number of columns of data collected and 226 is the number of steps, or readings, taken along the test strip. The first column contains information about the location on the test strip from which the data is obtained; the second column is the reflectance in the absence of illumination by the instrument (dark reading); the third column is the reflectance when the test strip is illuminated at the first wavelength (e.g. 430 nm); and the fourth column is the reflectance when the test strip is illuminated at the second wavelength (e.g. 595 nm). The information in the second column is usually zero, unless a light breach has occurred with the instrument. The reflectance values in the third and fourth column are preferably in the 3,000-24,000 range.
  • Where a bar code is read, between approximately 125-500 steps are performed in reading the bar code, therefore, the matrix size would be between 4×125 and 4×500.
  • In the preferred embodiment described herein, the ratiometric formula would read as follows:
    f(y)=[(R 430 nm /R max/430 nm *R max/595 nm /R 595 nm)]−1.
  • The algorithm calculates a reflectance ratio for each step, generating a fifth column of data. The information contained in the first, third and fourth columns can be converted into an image by plotting the first column (x-value) against the fifth column (y-value). Thus, the original data array has been converted to a 2-dimensional image, or an array of the size 1×226. The reflectance ratio is then plotted as a function of each step. In reading an assay test strip, as described above, the result is a two-peak graph with the peaks occurring at the two stripes, corresponding to the detection and control zones. The reflectance data may then be further processed to obtain an accurate determination of analyte concentration in the patient sample.
  • Where a bar code is read, a graph is produced that corresponds to the reflectance pattern of the bar code. Pattern matching is then performed using any of a number of methods commonly known to those of skill in the art in order to identify the bar code and associate it with the particular assay run.
  • Generating and Validating Images
  • The image created by a plot of the data obtained from reading an assay test strip, as described above, has three basic components: a baseline or background that is either flat or parabolic; a peak corresponding to the detection zone that is gaussian; and another peak corresponding to a control zone that also is gaussian.
  • The parabolic component can be defined using 3 variables:
    f(y)=Ax 2 +Bx+C.
  • Each of the gaussian curves can be defined using 3 variables:
    f(y)=Area*[exp−(x−μ)(x−μ)/2σ*σ]/(σ(2π)1/2)
      • where Area=area contained within the gaussian;
      • μ=x-value of center position; and
      • σ=width.
  • A second plot can be generated from the three component curves, using 9 variables. This process is accomplished using a curve-fit algorithm. Any such algorithm known in the art may be used. Alternatively, the 9 parameters may be obtained using neural networks, as described below. From the parameters generated from the curve-fit function, a showfit function is used to generate an image from the fitted data. For example, in the preferred embodiment, a showfit function is used to generate a 1×226 matrix representing the fitted curve defined by the 9 parameters.
  • The fitted image is then compared to the original scanned image, which is produced by plotting the 1×226 data points as discussed above, to measure the performance of the curve-fit function. This is accomplished by plotting the fitted image against the scanned image and solving the linear regression through these values. The fitted image is then compared to the original image by plotting the fitted image against the scanned image and solving the linear regression through the values, where an exact match would yield a line with slope=1 and r2=1).
  • Once the curves have been fitted, the peak height of the curve in the detection zone is determined by subtracting the parabolic baseline from the maximum peak height. The peak height is then compared to that of a previously run sample of known analyte concentration. If the peak height of the clinical sample is greater that the peak height of the reference sample, then the test result is positive. If not, a negative test result is returned. The peak height of the curve representing the control zone also may be checked to determine if it meets a required minimum height, in order to test that the system is functioning.
  • Alternatively, peak areas may be calculated and compared to give a determination of analyte concentration in the sample. The graph may be mathematically analyzed, with a sigmoidal calculation across the background and a gaussian calculation to integrate the area beneath each of the two peaks. The analyte concentration is then determined based upon the ratio of the integrated area beneath each of the two peaks.
  • Methods for Reducing the Image to Parameters
  • Images or large sets of data, are not readily amenable for developing and training neural net analyses. For large data sets, the number of inputs required for neural network training must be reduced. To do this assumptions regarding the types of data that can be omitted are made. As a result of the loss of information, the performance of subsequently trained neural nets will hinge on the validity of the assumptions made. A method for reduction of data that reduces dimensionality with minimal or no loss of information will avoid this problem. The reduced database can be validated by using it to reconstruct the original dataset. With minimal or no loss of information, subsequently trained networks should yield higher performance than networks that are trained with less complete data. Methods are provided herein for reducing dimensionality with minimal loss of information. These methods are directly applicable to the images that are generated and data generated from the test strips described herein and also is generally applicable to all images and large datasets.
  • Methods for Optimizing the Reconstructed Image
  • Parameters for a mathematical function designed to reproduce, or approximate the scanned image are effective at determining the concentration of the compound being tested and thereby providing a means to classify the sample being tested. Examination of the data, for example, from the fFN test provided herein demonstrates that a scanned image can be constructed from three basic elements. There is a background density, referred to herein as the baseline density. Superimposed on the baseline are the two peaks. The first peak is referred to as the control peak and the second is the test peak. Since the shape of these peaks is very similar to a normal curve, it was assumed that the peaks have a gaussian shape. One characteristic of the “normal curve” that can be exploited is that the area under the curve is always 1.0. By modifying the formula, the height of a peak can be determined from a single function parameter.
  • When analyzing an image, the peak density function used is:
    Peak Density=Height*EXP(−Z*Z)
      • where Z=(X−Pos)*S,
      • X=Pixel Number,
      • Pos=Pixel number of center of peak,
      • S=Spread or width of the peak, and
      • Height=Height of the peak.
        This function contains three parameters, Height, S and Pos. When the three parameters are set correctly, this function will closely match one of the peaks in the test strip image. With two peaks in the image, this function also can be used to estimate the second peak. With two peaks, there are six parameters so far that must be optimized. The goal of the optimization will be to change the above parameters in such a way as to reconstruct the image as closely as possible.
  • In order to reconstruct the image completely, the baseline of the image must also be estimated. Examination of scanned images showed that the baseline had a slight curve. By using a parabolic or quadratic form function, the baseline density is estimated. The function for the base density is,
    Base Density=X*X*Curve+X*Slope+Offset.
    Thus, the image can be accurately reconstructed by combining these three function in the following summation,
    Image Density=Base Density+Control Peak Density+Test Peak Density.
    This results in a total of nine parameters that must be optimized for an accurate reconstruction of the image.
  • The basic problem with attempting to fit this complex function to the test strip image is that there are no simple means for finding the optimal values for function parameters as there are for linear regression. There are many numerical techniques that can be used to optimize the parameters of the above image density function. The one used here is the downhill simplex method (see, “Numerical Recipes in C,” Second Edition, Cambridge University Press, 1992).
  • The basic method of this optimization uses an iterative approach to optimize the function parameters based on a defined cost function. Here the cost function is defined as the sum of the squares of the differences between the original image and the reconstructed image for every pixel in the scanned image. The downhill simplex method uses a simplex to accomplish this optimization. A simplex is a geometrical figure in N dimensions containing N+1 points. For the image density function defined above, N has the value 9. In two dimensions, for example, a simplex will contain 3 points, with lines connecting each pair of points. This simplex is called a triangle. As the dimension increases, the complexity of the simplex also increases. In three dimensions a simplex is a tetrahedron. This implies that if there are N parameters to be optimized, then N+1 solutions must be maintained. This translates to N2+N storage locations that are required to run the algorithm.
  • For exemplification, the optimization problem with 2 parameters is as follows. The simplex, a triangle, is formed from three points or three different sets of values for the parameters. These three points (call them solutions A, B and C), which are generated in the following way. Starting with and initial set of parameters (solution A), each parameter is perturbed by a small amount (typically 0.01). When the first of the two parameters is changed, solution B is generated. When the second parameter is perturbed, solution C is generated. The three solutions must be evaluated to determine the error function value for each.
  • Suppose that solution A has the highest error function value. The simplex algorithm attempts to make an improvement by picking a new point (solution, or set of parameters), that lowers the error function value. This basic operation is called a reflection. Three attempts are made at improving the solution. The first, normal, reflection picks its new set of parameters by forming a line from point A to the average of the remaining points. The line is then extended through the average point an equal distance. This new point is the reflection point. Reflection is the correct term since if one were to place a mirror on the line between B and C, the new point corresponds exactly to the reflection of A in the mirror.
  • If the new error function value for the normal reflection is better than the best current solution, then an expansion reflection is attempted. In this case the line from A is extended by the Step Up Factor (typically 1.50) through the average point. This operation makes the simplex larger. The point that gave the best error function value (either the normal reflection of A or the Expansion reflection of A) is retained as the new A point.
  • If the new error function value for the normal reflection is still the worst solution, then a contraction reflection is attempted. In this case the line from A is extended by the Step Down Factor (typically 0.75) through the average point. This operation makes the simplex smaller. If this solution is better than the original error function value for point A, the reflection point is retained as point A. If no improvement is made in the A solution, then the entire simples is contracted by moving each point toward the point with the best error function value by the fraction specified by the Shrink Factor (typically 0.95). These reflection operations continue until the difference between the best and worst solutions falls below the Restart Tolerance (typically 1.0E−9).
  • Alternative Method 1 for Reducing the Image to Parameters Using a Neural Network
  • A neural network can be used as an alternative to a polynomial mathematical function for the purpose of generating parameters that can be used to reconstruct an image. The basic architecture of the neural network contains at least three processing layers. During the training process, a sequence of example images are presented to the network for training. Training continues so that the error between each image and its reconstruction is minimized across the set of images used for training. The image, or a subsection of the image, is presented to the input layer of the network. The middle layer, or hidden layer, of the network contains a number of processing element that is much smaller then the number of inputs in the input layer. The output layer contains the same number of processing elements as the input layer. The output layer of the network will represent the reconstructed image that is presented to the input layer.
  • An alternative architecture contains an odd number of hidden layers, with the middle hidden layer containing a much smaller number of processing elements than the input and output layers. In each layer of the network, each processing element is connected to each of the processing element outputs of the previous layer.
  • The processing element used in the network typically generates a weighted sum of the inputs to processing element, with a transfer function applied to the weighted sum to generate the output of the processing element. The transfer function is any such function normally used in a neural network, including the sigmoid function, or the hyperbolic tangent function.
  • The neural network can be trained using any standard neural network training rule, including the back propagation learning rule. At each step of the training process, a training image is presented to the inputs of the neural network. The same image also is be presented to the outputs of the network as the desired, or target, output of the network. As learning proceeds, the error between the outputs of the neural network and the desired outputs of the network decreases.
  • In order for the error to decrease, the neural network middle hidden layer generates a greatly reduced representation of the input image that contains enough information to reconstruct the image. This reduced representation therefore also contains the information needed to classify the image.
  • Once trained, a new image is presented to the inputs of the neural network. The outputs of the middle hidden layer are then be used as the inputs to the classification means for further processing.
  • Alternative Method 2 for Reducing the Image to Parameters Using a Neural Network
  • A second alternative method for reducing an image to useful parameters is to substitute the neural network directly in place of the polynomial mathematical function. Here, the inputs of the neural network are the coordinates of the pixel in the image being examined. The desired output of the network are the density value of the associated pixel.
  • The architecture of this neural network is substantially smaller then the architecture described in the first alternative method. Here the weights of the neural network become the parameters to be used by the classifier. The types of processing elements used in this architecture include the radial basis function type, and provisions might be made to allow a mix of processing element types in the hidden layer of the neural network. The architecture is developed to provide the smallest possible number of weights while still being capable of reconstructing the image.
  • In this alternative, the neural network is trained only on the image under consideration. Thus, each time a sample is tested, the network would be retrained. The weights of the trained network are used as inputs to the classification means.
  • Validation Method for Classifying the Image from the Parameters
  • Once the parameters are estimated, the parameters generated from the image reconstruction process along with several parameters easily calculated from the scanned image are used to classify the sample. In addition, the image parameters from several reference scans were used. The process of classification incorporates two steps. The first is a validation step to determine if the sample under consideration should be rejected or classified. The validated result is then classified as positive or negative as described above.
  • To ensure the accuracy of a test result, the system producing that result should be validated. Validation protocols are used to confirm that all components of a system operate properly, and that the data received from the system is meaningful. Moreover, in systems where raw data from instruments are manipulated by software, the proper functioning of that software should also be validated.
  • Validation of data analysis software can be performed in any number of ways. Typically, a known sample (e.g., reference, positive control, negative control) can be tested in the system to validate that the expected result is obtained. Alternatively, known raw data can be stored in memory and acted upon by the data analysis software to validate that the expected result is obtained. Such validation protocols ensure that the software is operating properly before a clinical sample of interest is evaluated by that system.
  • Validation of test systems also can be performed during the evaluation of a clinical sample being tested by that system. These types of validation protocols can evaluate components of the system, either individually or together. When the criteria set by validation protocols are not achieved, an invalid result is obtained, and the user will be made aware of the system malfunction. Such processes ensure that only accurate test results are presented to the user.
  • In an exemplary embodiment, for example, data are validated by several methods. First, the data are checked for completeness by checking that the size of the matrix is m×n, where m is the number of columns of data collected (e.g., location on dipstick, dark reading, reflectance at λ1 and reflectance at λ2) and n is the number of steps, or readings, taken along the test strip. For example, in the preferred embodiment, the matrix must be of an exact size of 4×226.
  • Next, the maximum peak heights must meet certain minimum values or the test data are invalid. For example, if the sample in question is a fFN positive reference (i.e. about 50 ng/ml of fFN) in the fFN point of care test (POCT), then the maximum control peak height must be between 0.200 and 1.500 units (inclusive) and the maximum test peak height must be between 0.020 and 0.310 units (inclusive) or the result is invalid.
  • If the sample in question is a fFN POCT positive control, then the maximum test peak height of the positive control (i.e, a control sample that always yields a positive result, typically about 70 to 80 ng/ml for the fFN POCT) must be greater than the maximum test peak height of the positive reference, or the result is invalid.
  • If the sample in question is a negative control (i.e., always yields a negative result, which for the fFN POCT is about 10-15 ng/ml), then the maximum test peak height of the negative control must be less than the maximum test peak height of the positive reference, or the result is invalid.
  • A run is only valid when the results of the fFN positive reference, positive control and negative control are all valid.
  • If the sample in question is a clinical sample, then the maximum control test peak height must be greater than about 0.20 units, or the result for that sample is invalid. Note, however, that the run may remain valid.
  • For comparison of the fitted image and the scanned image by solving the linear regression, the slope must be between 0.99 and 1.10, or the result is invalid. If the sample is a positive reference, positive control or negative control, then the run is invalid. If the sample is a clinical sample, then the run remains valid. The value of r2 must be greater than 0.78, or the result is invalid. If the sample is a positive reference, positive control or negative control, then the run is invalid. If the sample is a clinical sample, the run remains valid.
  • For a valid result and valid run, if the maximum peak height of the clinical sample is greater than or equal to the maximum peak height of the positive reference, the test result is positive. If the maximum peak height of the clinical sample is less than the maximum peak height of a negative reference, the result is negative.
  • Thus, the validated result is then classified as positive or negative as follows:
      • a) for a valid result and valid run, if maximum peak height of clinical sample is greater than or equal to maximum peak height of fFN positive reference, the result is positive.
      • b) for a valid result and valid run, if maximum peak height of clinical sample is less than maximum peak height of fFN negative reference, the result is negative.
  • Alternatively, instead of calculating height, the areas under the curves can be compared. The same data are obtained, if the area under the curve from a clinical sample is compared to the area under the curve of the 50 ng/ml reference sample.
  • Alternative Method for Classifying the Image Using a Neural Network
  • Based on the available data generated from scans all possible variables were identified that could be used to improve the ability to classify the sample. The initial training runs used the parameters generated from the image reconstruction process along with several parameters easily calculated from the scanned image. One such parameter is the area under a peak. It can be calculated from original parameters as following:
      • Area=sqrt(n)*Height/S, where S is spread or width of the peak. A sigma variable, related to the normal distribution also can be calculated from the parameters by:
        Sigma=1/(sqrt(2)*S).
        In addition, the image parameters from a Calibrator scan (fFN positive reference) were also used. The following is a list of the variables that are available for use by the neural network.
    • 1. Sample Baseline Square Term
    • 2. Sample Baseline Linear Term
    • 3. Sample Baseline Offset
    • 4. Sample Control Peak Position
    • 5. Sample Control Peak Sigma
    • 6. Sample Control Peak Area
    • 7. Sample Test Peak Position
    • 8. Sample Test Peak Sigma
    • 9. Sample Test Peak Area
    • 10. Sample Test Peak Height
    • 11. Sample Control Peak Height
    • 12. Sample Baseline estimated value between the peaks
    • 13. Sample Ratio of Test Area to Control Area
    • 14. Sample Ratio of Test Height to Control Height
    • 15. Calibrator Baseline Square Term
    • 16. Calibrator Baseline Linear Term
    • 17. Calibrator Baseline Offset
    • 18. Calibrator Control Peak Position
    • 19. Calibrator Control Peak Sigma
    • 20. Calibrator Control Peak Area
    • 21. Calibrator Test Peak Position
    • 22. Calibrator Test Peak Sigma
    • 23. Calibrator Test Peak Area
    • 24. Calibrator Test Peak Height
    • 25. Calibrator Control Peak Height
    • 26. Calibrator Baseline estimated value between the peaks
    • 27. Calibrator Ratio of Test Area to Control Area
    • 28. Calibrator Ratio of Test Height to Control Height
      Four predictor variables were also added. In these variables the calibrator strip value is compared to the sample strip value and a +1 or −1 is used depending on the comparison. The additional variables are:
    • Test Area Predictor
    • Area Ratio Predictor
    • Test Height Predictor
    • Height Ratio Predictor.
      The desired, or target output of the neural network was a classification of the concentration of the sample. If the sample concentration was greater than or equal to 50 ng/ml the desired output was set to 1.0. The desired output was set to 0 otherwise. A sensitivity analysis of the associated training runs was used to indicate which variables were important to the prediction task. The ThinksPro software product from Logical Designs Consulting was used to train the networks and perform the sensitivity analysis. Alternatively, a variable selection process based on genetic algorithms or some other method could be used to select the best subset of variables from this list (see, e.g., copending U.S. application Ser. Nos. 08/798,306 and 08/912,133, which describe a suitable variable selection process).
  • Using the reduced set of variables one or more networks are trained to estimate the classification of the sample. If more than one network is used, the outputs of each network are averaged together to give a consensus result.
  • In another embodiment, the nine variables may optionally be fed through a previously trained neural network to obtain a test result. For example, the nets may be trained with data for which ELISA test results are known. Alternatively, variables other than the nine described above may be used to train the neural net. The nets can be used not only to return positive or negative results, but also to determine if the assay itself is valid for any particular run.
  • The reduction of data for input to neural networks can be accomplished by a neural network itself. An example of such a net is a net with an hourglass architecture with an input, output and three hidden layers, wherein the input and output layers contain n nodes, with the first and third hidden layers containing less than n nodes, and the second hidden layer containing five nodes. If trained so that the output layer exactly matches the input layer, such nets would reduce the original dataset of n elements down to five elements, and also retain the ability to reconstruct the original dataset of n elements from these five elements.
  • Further Analysis Using Decision Support Systems
  • The output from the data analysis step provides an assessment of the raw biochemical test data that is measured by the reader or other instrument. Such data may then be considered as is, but is can be further entered into a decision-support system, particularly a neural network, that has been trained to evaluate the particular data and disease. For example, U.S. application Ser. No. 08/599,275, now abandoned, copending U.S. application Ser. No. 08/798,306, and copending U.S. application Ser. No. 08/912,133, filed Aug. 14, 1997, as well as published International PCT application No. WO 97/29447, which claims priority to U.S. application Ser. No. 08/599,275, filed Feb. 9, 1996, now abandoned, and copending U.S. application Ser. No. 08/798,306 and corresponds to U.S. application Ser. No. 08/912,133 describe neural nets and methods for developing neural networks for diagnosis of disorders. The accuracy of biochemical test data is improved when used in these neural nets. Such neural nets, are thus contemplated for inclusion in the systems herein.
  • Briefly, in the methods described in these applications patient data or information, typically patient history or clinical data, are analyzed by the decision-support systems to identify important or relevant variables and decision-support systems are trained on the patient data. Patient data are augmented by biochemical test data or results to refine performance. The resulting decision-support systems are employed to evaluate specific observation values and test data to guide the development of biochemical or other diagnostic tests, to assess a course of treatment, to identify new diagnostic tests and disease markers, to identify useful therapies, and to provide the decision-support functionality for the test. Methods for identification of important input variables for medical diagnostic tests for use in training the decision-support systems to guide the development of the tests, for improving the sensitivity and specificity of such tests, and for selecting diagnostic tests that improve overall diagnosis of, or potential for, a disease state and that permit the effectiveness of a selected therapeutic protocol to be assessed also are provided. The methods for identification can be applied in any field in which statistics are used to determine outcomes. A method for evaluating the effectiveness of any given diagnostic test also is provided.
  • Thus, such neural networks or other decision-support systems will be included in the systems provided herein as a means of improving performance of the biochemical test data.
  • The following examples are included for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
  • EXAMPLE 1
  • Immunoassay Test Strip
  • A. The Test Strip
  • The test strip 100 includes a membrane system including three components: a porous or bibulous member 102; a conjugate pad 108; and an absorbent pad 110. The membrane system may be mounted on a substrate or backing 112, with the conjugate pad 108 and the absorbent pad 110 slightly overlapping the porous or bibulous member 102, which is interposed therein between. As can be seen in FIGS. 1A and 1B, the conjugate pad 108 overlaps the porous or bibulous member 102 so that a fluid sample placed onto the conjugate pad 108 is communicated from the conjugate pad 108 to the porous or bibulous member 102. Similarly, the absorbent pad 110 overlaps with the porous or bibulous member 102 so that fluid samples introduced into the porous or bibulous member 102 from the conjugate pad 108 can then be transmitted to the absorbent pad 110. Thus, the conjugate pad 108, the absorbent pad 110 and the porous or bibulous member 102 are all in fluid communication with one another, making any fluid sample placed on the conjugate pad 108 able to propagate through the conjugate pad 108 to the porous or bibulous member 102 and then to the absorbent pad 110.
  • The porous or bibulous member is capable of transporting a liquid sample along the test strip and serves as the solid support upon which the immunoreactions occur. Antibodies which react with the target analyte and/or label are immobilized on the solid support. Possible solid supports include paper and cellulose derivatives, such as cellulose esters and ethers, natural and synthetic polymeric materials, such as vinyl polymers and partially hydrolyzed derivatives, polycondensates, copolymers and inorganic materials. A preferred solid support is a nitrocellulose membrane.
  • The porous or bibulous member contains two distinct zones, a detection zone 104 and a control zone 106, at which two different antibodies are immobilized. The detection zone contains an immobilized capture antibody that binds the analyte of interest, whereas the control zone contains an immobilized antibody or other component, such as an antigen, that binds labeled antibody conjugate (discussed below) which has not bound to analyte.
  • The membrane system also includes a conjugate pad 108, which serves as a sample application component, and which includes an antibody to the analyte, which is conjugated to a detectable label. The conjugate pad is in fluid communication with the porous or bibulous member 102. The labeled antibody conjugate is diffusively bound to the conjugate pad and becomes mobile upon application of the liquid sample and moves along the test strip. The conjugate pad is made of a porous material, such as glass fiber. The conjugate pad also may act as a pre-filter for the sample.
  • The membrane system also may include an absorbent pad 110, which also is in fluid communication with the porous or bibulous member, and which serves to draw liquid continuously through the device. The absorbent strip may be made of a material such as cellulose paper or other material known to those of skill in the art.
  • Referring to FIG. 2A, which depicts an exemplary immunoassay device 200, including a test strip and housing assembly 200, the housing 202 generally surrounds the test strip 100 (FIGS. 1A and 1B) and includes an opening through which test sample is applied 204, as well as an aperture above the detection and control zones 206 that permits measurement of the amount of label by the reader, which is correlated with the amount of analyte in the test sample. The housing 202 includes at its upper surface 208 a fattened end 210, used for gripping the housing 202, an application window 204 (or sample window) through which a sample is applied to a conjugate pad 108 of an immunoassay test strip within the housing 202. The housing 202 also includes a test window 214 through which the test result of the immunoassay is viewed. In accordance with the embodiments shown, no window material is mounted within the test window 214 (or the sample window 212). Thus, an optical path from outside the housing 202 through the test window 214 to the immunoassay test strip is unobscured by even a transparent material. Other alternative embodiments may include an optically transparent material (transparent at wavelengths emitted by light emitted from devices described herein), however, such is not preferred. Also, as shown in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, the housing may include a symbology, exemplified as a bar code 216 or 316 that can be read by the reader or a separate reading device and associated with identifying information pertaining to the particular device and/or test run or other information.
  • An alternative embodiment of the test device is shown in FIG. 2B. The components of device are shown in FIG. 3 and include the upper and lower members 302 and 304 of the housing and the test strip 100. Also shown are the sample application port 306, test window 308, and the optionally included bar code 316.
  • Referring next to FIG. 4 a top view is shown of the immunoassay test strip housing 202 of FIG. 2A. Shown are the sample window 212, and the test window 214, and the enlarged gripping portion 210. Also shown are structures 402 for holding the immunoassay test assembly within the housing 202 and structures 404 for securing upper and lower halves of the housing 202 to one another.
  • Referring next to FIG. 5, a side cross-sectional assembly view is shown of the housing 202 for the immunoassay test strip 100. Shown are the sample window 212, the test window 214, and the structures 402 for holding the immunoassay test strip assembly in place within the housing 202. As can be seen, an upper half 502 of the housing 202 is mated with a lower half 504 of the housing 202. The immunoassay test strip is sandwiched between the upper and lower halves 502 and 504 of the housing 202 and is secured in place by the structures 402 of the upper half 502. The immunoassay test strip is positioned so as to be viewable through the test window 214 when the immunoassay test strip assembly is secured within the housing and the conjugate pad is positioned to be contactable through the sample window 212.
  • These devices are particularly adapted for use with the reflectance reader provided herein.
  • B. Colored Latex Label
  • The immunoassay test strip includes a membrane system supported on a plastic backing. The membrane system is formed from three partially overlapping materials: a conjugate pad made of Whatman glass fiber (F075-07S, 2.4 cm length) treated with polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), a nitrocellulose strip supplied by Sartorius (8 μm, 3.3 cm length) and an absorbent pad made of Whatman C7218 (1.65 cm length) cellulose paper. These three materials are in fluid communication with each other. The conjugate pad and nitrocellulose overlap by 1 mm and the nitrocellulose and absorbent pad overlap by 4 mm. The membrane materials are hand-laminated and attached to a membrane card, which is cut using an Azco guillotine compression cutter, using G&L adhesive membrane.
  • The conjugate pad contains a mouse monoclonal anti-fFN antibody (FDC-6 or A137) conjugated to latex particles containing a blue dye. The conjugate pad acts as a pre-filter for the sample in that mucous from the sample is left behind in the conjugate pad after performing the assay.
  • The latex particles, which are polymerized from styrene and acrylic acid, may be any suitable latex particles (such as are available from Bangs Laboratories). The particles are polymerized in an aqueous solution with a surfactant added. The particles are internally labeled with blue dye by swelling the particles in organic solvent and adding the dye. The particles are then placed in an aqueous solvent, which shrinks the particles and traps the dye. The dye is an organic soluble blue dye. Carboxyl groups are covalently attached to the surface of the bead for coupling to the antibody. The particles are supplied as a 2.5-10% aqueous suspension containing surfactant as Bangs Uniform Microsphere Stock D0004031 CB and have a mean diameter of 0.40 μm, with a standard deviation of 0.4 μm, and a surface area of 1.405e+13 μM2/g.
  • Antibodies are conjugated to the latex particles in a one-step covalent conjugation process using EDAC, a carbodiimide coupling reagent. The conjugate is characterized as 1% solids; 50 μg/mg beads total bound protein (Bead BCA); and >80% covalent bound protein (Tris-SDS+Bead BCA).
  • The antibody conjugated to the latex particles is mouse monoclonal antibody specific for fetal fibronectin. The antibody (FDC-6 or A137 monoclonal) is raised against whole molecule onco-fetal fibronectin from a tumor cell line. The antibody is produced as ascites at a contract manufacturer and is purified by Protein G and dialyzed into PBS buffer.
  • The nitrocellulose strip contains two distinct zones, a detection zone and a control zone, at which two different antibodies are immobilized. The detection zone contains immobilized anti-fibronectin polyclonal antibody as a capture antibody, whereas the control zone contains immobilized goat anti-mouse polyclonal antibody. The anti-fibronectin polyclonal antibody is produced in goats. The antisera is obtained from a commercial source and is purified by use of a fibronectin column which is made by attaching purified fibronectin (antigen) to a resin. The antisera is passed through a column containing the resin. After washing unbound material, the antibody is eluted via low pH glycine. The purified antibody is then dialyzed. The goat anti-mouse IgG antibody (GAMGG) immobilized in the control zone is obtained from Biosource. The antibody is purified by passing the serum through a mouse IgG column, which binds the antibody, and then eluting off the antibody using glycine.
  • The antibodies are applied to the conjugate pad and nitrocellulose strip using an IVEK Linear Striper, which is a volumetric ceramic piston pump dispenser. The anti-fibronectin polyclonal capture antibody is applied in a 1× Spotting Buffer P/N 00387, which contains citrate, phosphate and NaCl, at an antibody concentration of 1 mg/ml and a striping rate of 1 μl/sec. The position of the test line is 3740 mm from the bottom of the strip. The control antibody is applied in a 1× Spotting Buffer P/N 00387 at a concentration of 0.5 mg/ml and a striping rate of 1 μl/sec. The position of the control line is 43-46 mm from the bottom of the strip. The dimensions of the antibody stripes are approximately 7.5 mm (wide)×0.5-1.0 mm (high). The nitrocellulose strip is not otherwise treated after application of the capture and control antibodies to block non-specific binding sites.
  • The detection and control stripes are applied to the strip and then dried for 60 minutes at RT, after which the conjugate is striped onto the strip. The conjugate is mixed in a diluent containing 20% sucrose, 0.2% BSA, 0.5% TW20 and 100 mm Tris. After application of the conjugate, the strip is then dried for 30 min. at 37° C.
  • The test strip is contained within a housing, which includes a lower member and an upper member with openings that include a circular aperture above the area of the conjugate pad, through which test sample is applied, and a rectilinear aperture above the detection and control zones. The circular application aperture is in contact with the test strip. The latex conjugate is placed slightly downstream from the sample application opening. The upper and lower members are mated together to sandwich the test strip. The test strip is confined non-removably in the housing, and the device is not intended to be re-usable. The upper member is configured for use with a reader that measures the amount of label that is indicative of the amount of fetal fibronectin in the test sample.
  • C. Colloidal Gold Label
  • In an alternative embodiment, colloidal gold is used for labeling the antibody. The test strip configuration is similar to that described in EXAMPLE 1A for the latex particle embodiment, with the following modifications.
  • In the colloidal gold assay, a goat polyclonal antibody to human adult and fetal fibronectin is present in the conjugate pad, immobilized mouse monoclonal anti-fetal fibronectin antibody (specific to the III CS region of fetal fibronectin) is present in the detection zone of the nitrocellulose test strip and immobilized human adult fibronectin is present in the control zone.
  • The anti-fibronectin antibodies (polyclonal) are labeled with colloidal gold by passively adsorbing anti-fibronectin antibodies onto colloidal gold. This preparation is then treated with a solution containing protein and polyvinyl pyrrolidone (PVP) to coat the colloidal gold particles. This method is described in Geoghegan and Ackerman, Journal of Histochemistry and Cytochemistry, 25(11):1187-1200 (1977).
  • EXAMPLE 2
  • Immunoassay Procedure
  • A. Colored Latex Label
  • In conducting the assay, the sample is extracted from a swab into antiprotease transfer buffer (0.05 M Tris buffer, pH 7.4, 1% BSA, 5 mM EDTA, 1 mM phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride (PMSF), and 500 Kallikrein Units/ml of Aprotinin), heated for 15 min. at 37° C. and filtered through a large pore (25μ) plunger filter. A volume of 200 μl of test sample is then delivered to the conjugate pad at the application zone using a standard plastic pipet. Any fFN in the sample will bind to the labeled monoclonal antibody and the resulting complex migrates into the nitrocellulose strip. When the complex encounters the detection zone, the immobilized anti-FN antibody binds the complex, thereby forming a colored stripe due to the aggregation of the dye-containing latex beads. Any unbound latex-conjugated anti-fFN antibody continues to migrate into the control zone where it is captured by the immobilized goat anti-mouse antibody and thereby forms a colored stripe due to the aggregation of the dye-containing latex beads. The reaction time is 20 minutes.
  • B. Colloidal Gold Label
  • The test strip assay procedure is similar to that described in EXAMPLE 2A for the latex particle embodiment, with the following modifications. The buffer used to extract the sample is Tris-acetate and a protein matrix (4% PSA and 4% PVP).
  • Fetal fibronectin and adult human fibronectin in the sample bind with the labeled anti-fibronectin antibody conjugate on the conjugate pad. The labeled fetal fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complex and adult human fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complexes, and unbound labeled anti-fibronectin conjugate migrate into the nitrocellulose strip, where they encounter the detection region, including immobilized anti-fetal fibronectin monoclonal antibody.
  • In the detection region, the immobilized anti-fetal fibronectin capture antibody binds with the fetal fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complex, whereby a gold label forms a colored stripe due to the concentration of the gold label. The amount of gold label bound to the test region correlates with the amount of fetal fibronectin in the sample.
  • The unbound labeled anti-fibronectin antibody conjugate and adult human fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complex then pass to the control region of the immunoassay test strip, which includes immobilized adult human fibronectin. There, any unbound antibody conjugate binds to the immobilized adult human fibronectin, where the gold label forms a second colored stripe. The presence of a colored stripe indicates that the assay results are valid, whereas the absence of this stripe indicates that the results are not valid, i.e., that the sample did not reach the control region, and thus a good reading at the test region cannot be assumed. Any adult human fibronectin-anti-fibronectin complexes formed do not bind with the detection or control zones.
  • EXAMPLE 3
  • Operation of the Reflectance Reader
  • The test strip is read using the reflectance reader exemplified herein. This reader (described above) is adapted to read an immunochromatographic test strip supported within the housing. The reflectance reader includes a cassette slot for receiving the test-strip housing, and a sensing head assembly for reading the test strip supported within the test-strip housing using reflected light. The sensing head assembly includes a first light-emitting diode (LED1), a second LED (LED2), a silicon photodiode detector, and 39 optical fibers randomly arranged in a narrow slit (e.g., 0.020″ wide) located at the bottom of the sensing head assembly. LED1 emits light with a wavelength of 430 nm (blue), and LED2 emits light with a wavelength of 595 nm (amber). The optical fibers are arranged in three groups of 13 optical fibers each: the first group transmits light emitted by LED1 to the slit; the second group transmits light emitted by LED2 to the slit; and the third group transmits reflected light received at the slit to the photodetector. The 39 fibers each include an end randomly arranged within a plane located at the slit such that the ends are co-planar, with the plane being normal to the test strip when the sensing head assembly is positioned (as described below) to take reflectance readings. The optical fibers in each of the three groups are randomly arranged within the plane with respect to the fibers of the other two groups.
  • The slit width is selected to be as narrow as permitted, with the practical minimum being driven by the availability of small diameter optical fibers. The maximum slit width should not be larger than about 90% of the width of the colored stripe, otherwise the background of the strip, in addition to the colored stripe, will be read and less color will be detected, unless the slit, or aperture, is positioned directly above the colored stripe.
  • When the housing is inserted into the cassette slot of the reader, a spring mechanism rotates the sensing head directly over the second aperture of the housing such that the plane defined by the optical fibers is normal to the surface of the nitrocellulose strip at a distance of about 0.010.″ Light from LED1 and LED2 can be transmitted by the fibers onto the nitrocellulose strip at a normal angle, and light reflected normally from the strip can be transmitted by the fibers to the photodetector.
  • The sensing head takes three separate reflectance readings of each portion of the nitrocellulose strip by reading the output of the photosensor while controlling LED1 and LED2. The first reading, used to determine the amount of ambient light leaking into the reader (e.g., light leaking through the slot entrance, or light reflected into the reader through the white plastic of the housing), is a dark reading taken with LED1 and LED2 both turned off. The dark reading count is subtracted from the other two readings to correct for light leakage. The second reading, used to determine background reflections associated with the nitrocellulose, is taken with LED1 pulsed on and LED2 turned off. The third reading, used to detect the presence of the latex label on the test strip, is taken with LED2 pulsed on and LED1 turned off. A control circuit reads the photodetector output and controls the on and off operation of LED1 and LED2. A memory circuit stores the raw and/or processed data. The data also may be displayed to the operator via an appropriate interface (e.g., an alphanumeric character matrix).
  • After being positioned above the housing by the spring mechanism, the sensing head can be moved slidably across the test strip to allow the head to scan the entire exposed surface of the nitrocellulose strip (including the detection and control zones). In the preferred embodiment, this distance is approximately 0.452.″ The head is slidably connected to a rail (e.g., guide rods), and is coupled to a worm or screw gear driven by a stepper motor. Under the control of the control circuit, the stepper motor drives the head along the rail in small steps (e.g., 0.002″/step). At each step, the control circuit takes three readings as described above. Thus, the control circuit moves the head such that the optical fibers pass directly above and normal to the exposed surface of the nitrocellulose strip in a sequence of small steps, and takes a sequence of dark, LED1 and LED2 readings at each step. The control circuit then processes the data read from the photodetector at each sequence of three readings to determine the presence or concentration of fFN.
  • Since the detection and control latex stripes are each about 0.020″ wide, and since each step of the sensing head is about 0.002″ long, there will be about 10 steps within each stripe. Thus, there will be 10 sets of three readings (i.e., dark, LED1 and LED2) at each of the stripes, and the remainder of the reading sets will not be made over either stripe.
  • The control circuit processes the LED1 and LED2 readings by first subtracting the “dark reading” taken at the corresponding step to correct for light leakage. The corrected LED1 and LED2 readings are then input into a ratiometric algorithm to determine the concentration of fFN. The algorithm is based upon the ratio of readings at the detection and control zones. If a sample includes a high concentration of fFN, latex readings at the detection zone will be relatively high and the readings at the control zone will be low. If the sample includes a low concentration of fFN, however, latex readings at the detection zone will be relatively low and readings at the control zone will be high. The algorithm calculates a reflectance ratio for each step which equals (amber count−dark count)/(blue count−dark count). Generally, light leakage is so minimal that this step can be omitted. If the reflectance ratio is graphed as a function of the steps, the result will be a two-peak graph with the peaks occurring at the two stripes. The graph is mathematically analyzed, with a sigmoidal calculation across the background and a gaussian calculation to integrate the area beneath each of the two peaks. The fFN concentration is then determined based upon the ratio of the integrated area beneath each of the two peaks.
  • In operation, when the test-strip housing is inserted into the cassette slot of the reader, the sensing head rotates down over the exposed nitrocellulose strip, and the control circuit then moves the head to an initial position. The control circuit moves the head across the exposed surface of the nitrocellulose strip, including the detection and control zones, in small increments of 0.002″ each. At each step, the control circuit takes a first reading of the photodetector output with LED1 and LED2 both off, takes a second reading with LED1 pulsed on and LED2 off, and takes a third reading with LED1 off and LED2 pulsed on. The control circuit then steps the sensing head and repeats the three readings. This process is repeated for each of 226 steps (0.452″ at 0.002″/step) until the entire surface is read. The control circuit may then analyze the raw data to determine the presence or concentration of fFN. The output values can be displayed via an operator interface, or can be output to another computer or apparatus.
  • Since modifications will be apparent to those of skill in this art, it is intended that this invention be limited only by the scope of the appended claims.

Claims (5)

1. A method for determining results from an immunoassay, comprising:
(a) testing a patient sample for the presence of a target analyte indicative of a condition or risk of having the condition by reacting the sample with antibodies specific for the analyte in a sandwich assay performed on a test strip, in which one of the antibodies is labeled with a detectable label; and
(b) detecting a reflectance signal produced by the label in a reflectance reader, wherein:
the reflectance reader includes a reader head that comprises:
(i) a reader head body;
(ii) a light emitting diode (LED);
(iii) a first fiberoptic bundle optically coupled to the light emitting diode;
(iv) a photodetector;
(v) a second fiberoptic bundle optically coupled to the photodetector; and
(vi) an aperture in the reader head body,
wherein fiberoptic conductor ends of the first fiberoptic bundle and fiberoptic conductor ends of the second fiberoptic bundle are arranged in a substantially co-planar relationship to form a planar surface, and the planar surface is substantially parallel to a plane at an upper surface of the test strip during reflectance signal detection, whereby light is conducted by fiberoptic bundles to the photodetector, which generates the reflectance signal indicative of an amount of reflected light; and
the reflectance signal is indicative of the presence of the analyte.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the fiberoptic conductor ends of the first fiberoptic bundle and the fiberoptic conductor ends of the second fiberoptic bundle are arranged in a sigmoidal distribution in the aperture.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the reader head further comprises a third fiberoptic bundle optically connected to a second light emitting diode, wherein fiberoptic conductor ends of the third fiberoptic bundle are arranged in a substantially coplanar relationship with the fiberoptic conductor ends of the first fiberoptic bundle and the fiberoptic conductor ends of the second fiberoptic bundle.
4. The method of claim 3, wherein the fiberoptic conductor ends of the first fiberoptic bundle and the fiberoptic conductor ends of the second fiberoptic bundle and the fiberoptic conductor ends of the third fiberoptic bundle are arranged in a sigmoidal distribution in the aperture.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the target analyte is fetal fibronectin.
US11/219,216 1998-02-03 2005-09-02 Point of care diagnostic systems Abandoned US20060014302A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/219,216 US20060014302A1 (en) 1998-02-03 2005-09-02 Point of care diagnostic systems

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/017,901 US6267722B1 (en) 1998-02-03 1998-02-03 Point of care diagnostic systems
US09/063,497 US6394952B1 (en) 1998-02-03 1998-04-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US09/717,478 US6867051B1 (en) 1998-02-03 2000-11-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US10/877,122 US7270970B2 (en) 1998-02-03 2004-06-25 Point of care diagnostic systems
US11/219,216 US20060014302A1 (en) 1998-02-03 2005-09-02 Point of care diagnostic systems

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/877,122 Division US7270970B2 (en) 1998-02-03 2004-06-25 Point of care diagnostic systems

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20060014302A1 true US20060014302A1 (en) 2006-01-19

Family

ID=26690482

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/063,497 Expired - Lifetime US6394952B1 (en) 1998-02-03 1998-04-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US09/717,355 Expired - Lifetime US6936476B1 (en) 1998-02-03 2000-11-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US09/717,478 Expired - Lifetime US6867051B1 (en) 1998-02-03 2000-11-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US10/877,122 Expired - Fee Related US7270970B2 (en) 1998-02-03 2004-06-25 Point of care diagnostic systems
US11/218,807 Abandoned US20060008923A1 (en) 1998-02-03 2005-09-02 Point of care diagnostic systems
US11/219,216 Abandoned US20060014302A1 (en) 1998-02-03 2005-09-02 Point of care diagnostic systems

Family Applications Before (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/063,497 Expired - Lifetime US6394952B1 (en) 1998-02-03 1998-04-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US09/717,355 Expired - Lifetime US6936476B1 (en) 1998-02-03 2000-11-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US09/717,478 Expired - Lifetime US6867051B1 (en) 1998-02-03 2000-11-20 Point of care diagnostic systems
US10/877,122 Expired - Fee Related US7270970B2 (en) 1998-02-03 2004-06-25 Point of care diagnostic systems
US11/218,807 Abandoned US20060008923A1 (en) 1998-02-03 2005-09-02 Point of care diagnostic systems

Country Status (10)

Country Link
US (6) US6394952B1 (en)
EP (2) EP1051687B1 (en)
JP (1) JP3515520B2 (en)
AT (1) ATE241825T1 (en)
AU (1) AU2655999A (en)
CA (1) CA2319731C (en)
DE (1) DE69908302T2 (en)
ES (1) ES2201672T3 (en)
HK (1) HK1029849A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1999039298A1 (en)

Cited By (48)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060094127A1 (en) * 2003-05-22 2006-05-04 Wen-Chao Tseng Method of automatically detecting a test result of a probe zone of a test strip
US20070185679A1 (en) * 2004-04-01 2007-08-09 Petruno Patrick T Indicating status of a diagnostic test system
US20080028261A1 (en) * 2005-12-19 2008-01-31 Petruno Patrick T End-of-life disabling of a diagnostic test system
WO2008115882A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-25 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Block verification of medical tests
US20100197000A1 (en) * 2005-06-28 2010-08-05 Shi Qinwei Membrane array and analytical device
EP2215475A1 (en) * 2007-10-23 2010-08-11 Skannex AS Immunoassay analysis method
EP2295970A1 (en) * 2008-05-29 2011-03-16 ARKRAY, Inc. Immunoassay analyzer and immunoassay method
US20110293153A1 (en) * 2008-11-14 2011-12-01 Optricon Gmbh Appliance and method for evaluation and assessment of a test strip
US20120122229A1 (en) * 2009-02-13 2012-05-17 Oxtox Limited Methods of assaying for tetrahydrocannabinol
US20130216998A1 (en) * 2010-07-20 2013-08-22 Becton, Dickinson And Company Method for linking point of care rapid diagnostic testing results to laboratory-based methods
US20140113357A1 (en) * 2011-05-25 2014-04-24 Ze'ev Russak Remote chemical assay system
US9535448B2 (en) 2011-11-16 2017-01-03 Jean-Pierre Key Chromatic mainframe
US9797903B2 (en) 2012-10-24 2017-10-24 Winthrop-University Hospital Non-invasive biomarker to identify subject at risk of preterm delivery
US9805165B2 (en) 2009-01-13 2017-10-31 Fio Corporation Handheld diagnostic test device and method for use with an electronic device and a test cartridge in a rapid diagnostic test
US9891217B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2018-02-13 Alverix, Inc. Assay test strips with multiple labels and reading same
WO2018075554A1 (en) * 2016-10-17 2018-04-26 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, LLC Pregnancy test to assess disease risk
US9989527B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2018-06-05 Alverix, Inc. Lateral flow assay systems and methods
US10331924B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2019-06-25 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for audiovisual response to retail diagnostic product
US10473659B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2019-11-12 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for immediate health assessment response system
US10527555B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2020-01-07 Reliant Immune Disgnostics, Inc. System and method for visual trigger to perform diagnostic test
US10631031B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2020-04-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for television network in response to input
US10636527B2 (en) 2018-06-06 2020-04-28 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for quantifying, ensuring, and triggering the prescriptive authority for a telemedicine session
US10902951B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2021-01-26 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for machine learning application for providing medical test results using visual indicia
US10930381B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-02-23 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Microfluidic testing system for mobile veterinary applications
US10930380B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-02-23 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Communication loop and record loop system for parallel/serial dual microfluidic chip
US11041185B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-06-22 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Modular parallel/serial dual microfluidic chip
US11107585B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2021-08-31 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc System and method for a digital consumer medical wallet and storehouse
US11112403B2 (en) 2019-12-04 2021-09-07 Progenity, Inc. Assessment of preeclampsia using assays for free and dissociated placental growth factor
US11112406B2 (en) 2018-06-15 2021-09-07 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for digital remote primary, secondary, and tertiary color calibration via smart device in analysis of medical test results
US11125746B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-09-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Two-sided flow-through immunoassay
US11125749B2 (en) 2018-06-06 2021-09-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for remote colorimetry and ratiometric comparison and quantification in analysis of medical test results
US11124821B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-09-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Microfluidic testing system with cell capture/analysis regions for processing in a parallel and serial manner
US11164680B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-11-02 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for initiating telemedicine conference using self-diagnostic test
US11170877B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-11-09 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, LLC System and method for correlating retail testing product to medical diagnostic code
US11200986B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-12-14 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Database and machine learning in response to parallel serial dual microfluidic chip
US11232872B2 (en) 2018-06-06 2022-01-25 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Code trigger telemedicine session
US11295859B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2022-04-05 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for handing diagnostic test results to telemedicine provider
US11333672B2 (en) 2017-09-13 2022-05-17 Progenity, Inc. Preeclampsia biomarkers and related systems and methods
US11437142B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2022-09-06 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Biofluidic triggering system and method
US11527324B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2022-12-13 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Artificial intelligence response system based on testing with parallel/serial dual microfluidic chip
US11579145B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-02-14 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for image analysis of medical test results
US11594337B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2023-02-28 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for advertising in response to diagnostic test results
US11599908B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2023-03-07 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for advertising in response to diagnostic test
US11651866B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-05-16 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for real-time insurance quote in response to a self-diagnostic test
US11693002B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-07-04 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for variable function mobile application for providing medical test results using visual indicia to determine medical test function type
US11802868B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-10-31 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for variable function mobile application for providing medical test results
US11915810B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2024-02-27 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for transmitting prescription to pharmacy using self-diagnostic test and telemedicine
US12009078B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2024-06-11 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for medical escalation and intervention that is a direct result of a remote diagnostic test

Families Citing this family (276)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6678669B2 (en) * 1996-02-09 2004-01-13 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Method for selecting medical and biochemical diagnostic tests using neural network-related applications
GB9610967D0 (en) 1996-05-24 1996-07-31 Cambridge Antibody Tech Specific binding members,materials and methods
US8071384B2 (en) 1997-12-22 2011-12-06 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. Control and calibration solutions and methods for their use
US6394952B1 (en) * 1998-02-03 2002-05-28 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Point of care diagnostic systems
US8974386B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2015-03-10 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US6175752B1 (en) 1998-04-30 2001-01-16 Therasense, Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US6949816B2 (en) 2003-04-21 2005-09-27 Motorola, Inc. Semiconductor component having first surface area for electrically coupling to a semiconductor chip and second surface area for electrically coupling to a substrate, and method of manufacturing same
US8480580B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2013-07-09 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US8346337B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2013-01-01 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US8465425B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2013-06-18 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US9066695B2 (en) 1998-04-30 2015-06-30 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US8688188B2 (en) * 1998-04-30 2014-04-01 Abbott Diabetes Care Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US20030176663A1 (en) * 1998-05-11 2003-09-18 Eidgenossische Technische Hochscule Specific binding molecules for scintigraphy
US20030045681A1 (en) * 1998-05-11 2003-03-06 Anthony J. Zelano Specific binding molecules for scintigraphy, conjugates containing them and therapeutic method for treatment of angiogenesis
DE19842046A1 (en) * 1998-09-14 2000-03-16 Siemens Ag Medical analysis data generation system
US20020107824A1 (en) * 2000-01-06 2002-08-08 Sajid Ahmed System and method of decision making
US20020004246A1 (en) * 2000-02-07 2002-01-10 Daniels Robert H. Immunochromatographic methods for detecting an analyte in a sample which employ semiconductor nanocrystals as detectable labels
US6540689B1 (en) * 2000-02-22 2003-04-01 Ntc Technology, Inc. Methods for accurately, substantially noninvasively determining pulmonary capillary blood flow, cardiac output, and mixed venous carbon dioxide content
JP2003524187A (en) * 2000-02-23 2003-08-12 ベッスト−テスト アンパーツゼルスカブ Method for correlating markers in body fluids, eg urine, with blood clotting activity
EP1259548A1 (en) * 2000-02-24 2002-11-27 Eidgenössische Technische Hochschule Zürich Antibody specific for the ed-b domain of fibronectin, conjugates comprising said antibody, and their use for the detection and treatment of angiogenesis
DE10023159A1 (en) * 2000-05-12 2001-12-06 Pe Diagnostik Gmbh Procedure for collecting and evaluating the data when admitting an operating room patient
ES2312478T3 (en) * 2000-09-07 2009-03-01 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft RECEIVER OF THE EDB FIBRONECTINE DOMAIN (II).
JP4797233B2 (en) * 2000-09-25 2011-10-19 パナソニック株式会社 Compact sample concentration measuring device
CN102012413B (en) * 2000-09-25 2012-11-21 松下电器产业株式会社 Device for chromatographic quantitative measurement
AU2002222476A1 (en) * 2000-12-14 2002-06-24 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem A device for composting organic material and the process for composting said organic material
US6560471B1 (en) 2001-01-02 2003-05-06 Therasense, Inc. Analyte monitoring device and methods of use
US6869405B2 (en) 2001-03-30 2005-03-22 Becton, Dickinson And Company Blunt cannula and filter assembly and method of use with point-of-care testing cartridge
US6770487B2 (en) 2001-05-01 2004-08-03 Ischemia Technologies, Inc. Bar code readable diagnostic strip test
IES20010724A2 (en) * 2001-07-30 2003-02-05 Univ Dublin Data processing system and method
US6814844B2 (en) 2001-08-29 2004-11-09 Roche Diagnostics Corporation Biosensor with code pattern
DE60108503T2 (en) * 2001-09-10 2006-03-23 Microlife Intellectual Property Gmbh Blood pressure monitoring and procedures to determine the risk of disease
US7312071B2 (en) * 2001-12-06 2007-12-25 Arbor Vita Corporation Effective monitoring system for anthrax smallpox, or other pathogens
US20030114763A1 (en) * 2001-12-13 2003-06-19 Reddy Shankara B. Fusion of computerized medical data
US8367013B2 (en) * 2001-12-24 2013-02-05 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Reading device, method, and system for conducting lateral flow assays
US7365849B2 (en) * 2001-12-27 2008-04-29 Taiwan Unison Biotechnology, Inc. Portable, scanning and analyzing apparatus
US7004928B2 (en) 2002-02-08 2006-02-28 Rosedale Medical, Inc. Autonomous, ambulatory analyte monitor or drug delivery device
US20030161762A1 (en) * 2002-02-08 2003-08-28 Michael Caron Instrument for determining concentration of multiple analytes in a fluid sample
US7324928B2 (en) * 2002-03-06 2008-01-29 Kitchen Scott G Method and system for determining phenotype from genotype
US20030175991A1 (en) * 2002-03-18 2003-09-18 Ho Winston Z. Optically-assisted high precision pregnancy progress monitoring
US7490049B2 (en) 2002-03-29 2009-02-10 Medco Health Solutions, Inc. Patient oriented point of care system and method
US7840421B2 (en) 2002-07-31 2010-11-23 Otto Carl Gerntholtz Infectious disease surveillance system
US7803322B2 (en) * 2002-08-14 2010-09-28 Detekt Biomedical, L.L.C. Universal optical imaging and processing system
US7136788B2 (en) * 2002-10-15 2006-11-14 The Boeing Company Optimized parametric modeling system and method
WO2004046686A2 (en) * 2002-11-19 2004-06-03 Jin Po Lee Method and system for analyzing test devices
US6845912B2 (en) * 2002-12-12 2005-01-25 Thomas Whittier Scannell Bar code for measuring distance and position
US7197169B2 (en) * 2003-01-02 2007-03-27 Kuo-Jeng Wang Method for detecting a response of each probe zone on a test strip
US20040266025A1 (en) 2003-02-06 2004-12-30 Durlin Hickok Screening and treatment methods for prevention of preterm delivery
US7052652B2 (en) 2003-03-24 2006-05-30 Rosedale Medical, Inc. Analyte concentration detection devices and methods
US20070003992A1 (en) * 2003-04-09 2007-01-04 Pentyala Srinivas N Methods and kits for detecting cerebrospinal fluid in a sample
US20040203079A1 (en) * 2003-04-09 2004-10-14 Research Foundation Of The State University Of New York Methods and kits for detecting cerebrospinal fluid in a sample
US8003765B2 (en) * 2003-04-09 2011-08-23 Stony Brook Anaesthesiology, University Faculty Practice Corporation Methods, antibodies and kits for detecting cerebrospinal fluid in a sample
DK1620714T3 (en) * 2003-04-15 2014-03-31 Senseonics Inc SYSTEM AND PROCEDURE TO IMPROVE THE EFFECT OF SURFACE LIGHT ON AN OPTICAL SENSOR
US7074194B2 (en) * 2003-05-19 2006-07-11 Ischemia Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and method for risk stratification of patients with chest pain of suspected cardiac origin
JP4623522B2 (en) * 2003-06-03 2011-02-02 シーメンス・ヘルスケア・ダイアグノスティックス・インコーポレーテッド Read head for optical inspection equipment
US7118713B2 (en) * 2003-06-03 2006-10-10 Bayer Healthcare Llc Tray assembly for optical inspection apparatus
US8148164B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2012-04-03 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. System and method for determining the concentration of an analyte in a sample fluid
US7452457B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2008-11-18 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. System and method for analyte measurement using dose sufficiency electrodes
US7718439B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2010-05-18 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. System and method for coding information on a biosensor test strip
US8058077B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2011-11-15 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. Method for coding information on a biosensor test strip
US7488601B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2009-02-10 Roche Diagnostic Operations, Inc. System and method for determining an abused sensor during analyte measurement
US8206565B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2012-06-26 Roche Diagnostics Operation, Inc. System and method for coding information on a biosensor test strip
US7645421B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2010-01-12 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. System and method for coding information on a biosensor test strip
US7645373B2 (en) 2003-06-20 2010-01-12 Roche Diagnostic Operations, Inc. System and method for coding information on a biosensor test strip
TWI225153B (en) * 2003-09-17 2004-12-11 Asn Technology Corp A method and a machine for measuring on rapid immunochromatographic test paper
JP2007507716A (en) * 2003-10-03 2007-03-29 バイエル・ヘルスケア・エルエルシー Correction of reflectance measurement accuracy
JP4150323B2 (en) * 2003-10-29 2008-09-17 浜松ホトニクス株式会社 Immunochromatographic test strip reader, cartridge used therefor, and immunochromatographic test strip inspection system
US7444005B2 (en) * 2003-11-04 2008-10-28 Becton, Dickinson And Company Apparatus and method for using optical mouse engine to determine speed, direction, position of scanned device and to obtain quantitative or qualitative data from same
JP5268255B2 (en) 2003-11-21 2013-08-21 エイエヌピー テクノロジーズ, インコーポレイテッド Asymmetric branched polymer conjugates and microarray assays
BRPI0417217A (en) * 2003-12-02 2007-03-13 Shraga Rottem artificial intelligence and device for diagnosis, selection, prevention and treatment of maternal and fetal conditions
US7254566B2 (en) * 2003-12-22 2007-08-07 Merkle Van D System and method for medical diagnosis
DE102004004626A1 (en) * 2004-01-29 2005-08-25 Siemens Ag Apparatus and method for receiving a high energy image
EP1713926B1 (en) 2004-02-06 2012-08-01 Bayer HealthCare, LLC Oxidizable species as an internal reference for biosensors and method of use
US8101431B2 (en) 2004-02-27 2012-01-24 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Integration of fluids and reagents into self-contained cartridges containing sensor elements and reagent delivery systems
US20050227370A1 (en) * 2004-03-08 2005-10-13 Ramel Urs A Body fluid analyte meter & cartridge system for performing combined general chemical and specific binding assays
US20050221504A1 (en) * 2004-04-01 2005-10-06 Petruno Patrick T Optoelectronic rapid diagnostic test system
US7521259B2 (en) * 2004-04-01 2009-04-21 Alverix, Inc. Assay test strips with multiple labels and reading same
US7162294B2 (en) 2004-04-15 2007-01-09 Ge Medical Systems Information Technologies, Inc. System and method for correlating sleep apnea and sudden cardiac death
US20050234354A1 (en) * 2004-04-15 2005-10-20 Rowlandson G I System and method for assessing a patient's risk of sudden cardiac death
US7415304B2 (en) * 2004-04-15 2008-08-19 Ge Medical Systems Information Technologies, Inc. System and method for correlating implant and non-implant data
US7272435B2 (en) * 2004-04-15 2007-09-18 Ge Medical Information Technologies, Inc. System and method for sudden cardiac death prediction
US7401058B2 (en) * 2004-04-29 2008-07-15 University Of Massachusetts Artificial neuron with phase-encoded logic
US7569126B2 (en) 2004-06-18 2009-08-04 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. System and method for quality assurance of a biosensor test strip
US7763454B2 (en) 2004-07-09 2010-07-27 Church & Dwight Co., Inc. Electronic analyte assaying device
AU2012244213B2 (en) * 2004-07-30 2015-02-05 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Oncofetal fibronectin as a marker for disease and other conditions and methods for detection of oncofetal fibronectin
US20060024722A1 (en) 2004-07-30 2006-02-02 Mark Fischer-Colbrie Samples for detection of oncofetal fibronectin and uses thereof
EP1794282A4 (en) * 2004-09-20 2011-03-23 Boston Microfluidics Microfluidic device for detecting soluble molecules
US20060094028A1 (en) * 2004-11-04 2006-05-04 Welch Allyn, Inc. Rapid diagnostic assay
US7925445B2 (en) * 2004-12-03 2011-04-12 Alverix, Inc. Read-write assay system
US20060128034A1 (en) * 2004-12-10 2006-06-15 Petruno Patrick T Diagnostic test using gated measurement of fluorescence from quantum dots
US20060167721A1 (en) * 2004-12-30 2006-07-27 Betty Bernard Methods for patient care using acuity templates
AU2006204886B2 (en) 2005-01-13 2011-08-04 Welch Allyn, Inc. Vital signs monitor
US7189522B2 (en) * 2005-03-11 2007-03-13 Chembio Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Dual path immunoassay device
WO2006098804A2 (en) * 2005-03-11 2006-09-21 Chembio Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Dual path immunoassay device
US7653611B2 (en) * 2005-03-30 2010-01-26 Microsoft Corporation Diagnostic report improvement utilizing unobtrusive workflow logging
US8460616B2 (en) * 2005-04-20 2013-06-11 Arkray, Inc. Analyzer, method for cleaning photometry mechanism in such analyzer, and cleaning tool
JP4755441B2 (en) * 2005-04-25 2011-08-24 株式会社日立製作所 Design support method and system
US8563329B2 (en) 2005-05-02 2013-10-22 Anp Technologies, Inc. Polymer conjugate enhanced bioassays
WO2006124917A2 (en) * 2005-05-18 2006-11-23 Siemens Medical Solutions Diagnostics Verification apparatus and methods for optical inspection machine
US8377398B2 (en) 2005-05-31 2013-02-19 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Methods and compositions related to determination and use of white blood cell counts
US20060281187A1 (en) 2005-06-13 2006-12-14 Rosedale Medical, Inc. Analyte detection devices and methods with hematocrit/volume correction and feedback control
WO2007002480A2 (en) * 2005-06-24 2007-01-04 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Systems and methods including self-contained cartridges with detection systems and fluid delivery systems
US8101415B2 (en) 2005-07-05 2012-01-24 Bayer Healthcare Llc Calibration system for use with lateral flow assay test strips
ES2717135T3 (en) 2005-07-20 2019-06-19 Ascensia Diabetes Care Holdings Ag Method to signal the user to add an additional sample to a test strip, method to measure the temperature of a sample and methods to determine the concentration of an analyte based on controlled amperometry
US8012103B2 (en) * 2005-09-30 2011-09-06 Intuity Medical, Inc. Catalysts for body fluid sample extraction
EP3483598A1 (en) 2005-09-30 2019-05-15 Ascensia Diabetes Care Holdings AG Gated voltammetry
US8801631B2 (en) 2005-09-30 2014-08-12 Intuity Medical, Inc. Devices and methods for facilitating fluid transport
US20070081920A1 (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-12 Murphy R S Semi-disposable optoelectronic rapid diagnostic test system
US7487134B2 (en) * 2005-10-25 2009-02-03 Caterpillar Inc. Medical risk stratifying method and system
KR100724597B1 (en) 2005-11-04 2007-06-04 한국생명공학연구원 Detection sensor for diagnosing liver diseases using the immunochromatographic strip
US20070129970A1 (en) * 2005-12-07 2007-06-07 Sultan Haider Method and apparatus for location and presentation of information in an electronic patient record that is relevant to a user, in particular to a physician for supporting a decision
FR2894674A1 (en) * 2005-12-14 2007-06-15 Diagnostica Stago Soc Par Acti BOX FOR ASSAYING A BIOLOGICAL SAMPLE BY IMMUNOCHROMATOGRAPHY
CA2634130C (en) 2005-12-21 2021-08-03 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc Assay apparatuses, methods and reagents
CN105115949B (en) * 2005-12-21 2018-06-22 梅索斯卡莱科技公司 Analytical equipment, method and reagent
US20070179815A1 (en) * 2006-01-20 2007-08-02 Heartscreen America, Inc. Medical screening system and method
US20070202561A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2007-08-30 Becton Dickinson And Company Electronic Detection Immunoassays that Utilize a Binder Support Medium
EP1826705A1 (en) * 2006-02-25 2007-08-29 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Analytical consumables and arrangement for reading information
US8789756B2 (en) * 2006-02-25 2014-07-29 Roche Diagnostics Operations, Inc. Test element coding apparatuses, systems and methods
US9119577B2 (en) * 2006-03-01 2015-09-01 Home Access Health Corporation Specimen collection device
US8920343B2 (en) 2006-03-23 2014-12-30 Michael Edward Sabatino Apparatus for acquiring and processing of physiological auditory signals
EP2010922B1 (en) * 2006-04-03 2012-06-27 Oratel Diagnostics, LLC Methods for endometriosis screening
US20080176253A1 (en) * 2006-05-10 2008-07-24 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Detecting human or animal immunoglobin-e
WO2007146378A2 (en) * 2006-06-13 2007-12-21 Jack Tawfik Diagnostic apparatus
US7547557B2 (en) * 2006-06-13 2009-06-16 Quantum Design, Inc. Directed-flow assay device
WO2008054611A2 (en) * 2006-10-04 2008-05-08 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Engineered conductive polymer films to mediate biochemical interactions
US20090061507A1 (en) * 2006-10-23 2009-03-05 Ho Winston Z Fluorescence-based lateral flow device with improved sensitivity
WO2008057781A2 (en) * 2006-10-27 2008-05-15 Montecito Bio-Sciences, Ltd. Portable apparatus for improved sample analysis
US20080105024A1 (en) * 2006-11-07 2008-05-08 Bayer Healthcare Llc Method of making an auto-calibrating test sensor
CA2580589C (en) 2006-12-19 2016-08-09 Fio Corporation Microfluidic detection system
US20080149720A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2008-06-26 Ncr Corporation Barcode environment enhancement
JP2010515884A (en) * 2007-01-08 2010-05-13 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Cooking oil quality certification apparatus and method
JP4966051B2 (en) * 2007-02-27 2012-07-04 株式会社東芝 Ultrasound diagnosis support system, ultrasound diagnosis apparatus, and ultrasound diagnosis support program
KR20080080841A (en) * 2007-03-02 2008-09-05 주식회사 아이센스 Electrochemical biosensor
KR100874158B1 (en) * 2007-03-14 2008-12-15 주식회사 아이센스 Electrochemical Biosensors and Measuring Instruments
US8360321B2 (en) 2007-04-02 2013-01-29 Fio Corporation System and method of deconvolving multiplexed fluorescence spectral signals generated by quantum dot optical coding technology
US20110029322A1 (en) * 2007-04-11 2011-02-03 Dr. Walid Hindo Health care system
WO2008144525A1 (en) 2007-05-16 2008-11-27 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology System and method for prediction and detection of circulatory shock
US8282564B2 (en) * 2007-05-16 2012-10-09 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Systems and methods for model-based estimation of cardiac output and total peripheral resistance
US8235910B2 (en) * 2007-05-16 2012-08-07 Parlikar Tushar A Systems and methods for model-based estimation of cardiac ejection fraction, cardiac contractility, and ventricular end-diastolic volume
GB2450351B (en) 2007-06-20 2012-01-18 Cozart Bioscience Ltd Monitoring an Immunoassay
EP2175999B1 (en) 2007-06-21 2017-01-04 Gen-Probe Incorporated Receptacles for use in performing processes
JP2010530912A (en) 2007-06-22 2010-09-16 フィオ コーポレイション Manufacturing system and method for polymer microbeads doped with quantum dots
WO2009006739A1 (en) 2007-07-09 2009-01-15 Fio Corporation Systems and methods for enhancing fluorescent detection of target molecules in a test sample
US8199370B2 (en) * 2007-08-29 2012-06-12 Scientific Games International, Inc. Enhanced scanner design
CN101861203B (en) 2007-10-12 2014-01-22 Fio公司 Flow focusing method and system for forming concentrated volumes of microbeads, and microbeads formed further thereto
WO2009141679A2 (en) * 2007-11-05 2009-11-26 Gal Markel Ceacam1 based point-of-care cancer diagnostic
US20090119130A1 (en) * 2007-11-05 2009-05-07 Zebadiah Kimmel Method and apparatus for interpreting data
US20090132443A1 (en) * 2007-11-16 2009-05-21 Odilo Mueller Methods and Devices for Analyzing Lipoproteins
WO2009076302A1 (en) 2007-12-10 2009-06-18 Bayer Healthcare Llc Control markers for auto-detection of control solution and methods of use
US20090155921A1 (en) * 2007-12-12 2009-06-18 Arbor Vita Corporation Method and apparatus for reading test strips
US8253725B2 (en) * 2007-12-28 2012-08-28 St. Jude Medical, Atrial Fibrillation Division, Inc. Method and system for generating surface models of geometric structures
WO2009111254A2 (en) * 2008-02-29 2009-09-11 Biomedomics, Inc. A rapid and sensitive method for quantitative determination of the level of heparin-pf4 complex induced immunoglobulin antibodies
EP2260299A4 (en) * 2008-03-04 2011-12-14 3M Innovative Properties Co Monitoring of frying oil quality using combined optical interrogation methods and devices
WO2009111372A2 (en) * 2008-03-04 2009-09-11 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods and devices for monitoring of frying oil quality
US8796184B2 (en) 2008-03-28 2014-08-05 Sentilus, Inc. Detection assay devices and methods of making and using the same
US20100063947A1 (en) * 2008-05-16 2010-03-11 Burnside Elizabeth S System and Method for Dynamically Adaptable Learning Medical Diagnosis System
CA2725264C (en) 2008-05-30 2017-06-20 Intuity Medical, Inc. Body fluid sampling device -- sampling site interface
EP3639744B1 (en) 2008-06-06 2021-11-24 Intuity Medical, Inc. Blood glucose meter and method of operating
EP2299903B1 (en) 2008-06-06 2021-01-27 Intuity Medical, Inc. Detection meter and mode of operation
WO2009155704A1 (en) 2008-06-25 2009-12-30 Fio Corporation Bio-threat alert system
US20100012490A1 (en) * 2008-07-15 2010-01-21 Tien-Tsai Hsu Test strip with optical identification patterns and test instrument using the same
US20110117673A1 (en) * 2008-07-16 2011-05-19 Johnson Brandon T Methods and systems to collect and prepare samples, to implement, initiate and perform assays, and to control and manage fluid flow
US8021873B2 (en) 2008-07-16 2011-09-20 Boston Microfluidics Portable, point-of-care, user-initiated fluidic assay methods and systems
US20100022916A1 (en) 2008-07-24 2010-01-28 Javanbakhsh Esfandiari Method and Apparatus for Collecting and Preparing Biological Samples for Testing
EP2346388A2 (en) * 2008-08-05 2011-07-27 Alere Switzerland GmbH A universal testing platform for medical diagnostics and an apparatus for reading testing platforms
JP2011530129A (en) * 2008-08-06 2011-12-15 エフ.ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー Medical system with small barcode reader for consumables
US8446463B2 (en) * 2008-08-22 2013-05-21 Genprime, Inc. Apparatus, method and article to perform assays using assay strips
BRPI0917839A2 (en) 2008-08-29 2015-11-24 Fio Corp single-use portable diagnostic test device, and associated system and method for testing environmental and biological test samples
US8046175B2 (en) * 2008-10-13 2011-10-25 Actherm Inc Analytical strip reading apparatus and the analyical strip used therein
EP2344863A2 (en) 2008-10-21 2011-07-20 Bayer HealthCare LLC Optical auto-calibration method
CN101790686B (en) 2008-11-20 2013-10-16 爱科来株式会社 Test tool, and optical measurement device
EP2375241A1 (en) * 2008-12-05 2011-10-12 Actherm Inc. A testing piece reader provided with a removable firmware
US20110318755A1 (en) * 2008-12-15 2011-12-29 Piasio Roger N Universal Testing Platform for Medical Diagnostics
DE102009010563A1 (en) 2009-02-16 2010-08-26 Matthias W. Engel Device for the detection of analytes in body fluids
CN104237539A (en) 2009-04-07 2014-12-24 连接Dx股份有限公司 Hand-held scanner systems and methods for reading point of care test results
CA2758526A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2010-10-21 Relia Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Diagnostic devices and related methods
CN102640002B (en) * 2009-05-20 2015-08-05 瑞莱诊断体系股份有限公司 Detect the system and method for glycosylated hemoglobin number percent
KR101027036B1 (en) * 2009-05-28 2011-04-11 주식회사 인포피아 Method for amplification of signal in lateral flow assay by reduction of gold ion and lateral flow assay device using the method
EP2490800A4 (en) * 2009-10-20 2013-05-01 Boston Microfluidics Methods and systems to collect and prepare samples, to implement, initiate and perform assays, and to control and manage fluid flow
EP2506768B1 (en) 2009-11-30 2016-07-06 Intuity Medical, Inc. Calibration material delivery devices and methods
CN101769925A (en) * 2009-12-22 2010-07-07 王继华 Method and system for intelligently identifying and reading immunity-chromatography test strip and application thereof
EP2388588B1 (en) * 2010-05-18 2013-10-30 Justus-Liebig-Universität Gießen Method and quick test for determining the fertility of sperms
US10330667B2 (en) 2010-06-25 2019-06-25 Intuity Medical, Inc. Analyte monitoring methods and systems
WO2012012500A1 (en) * 2010-07-20 2012-01-26 Nurx Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Optical reader systems and lateral flow assays
US20130158482A1 (en) 2010-07-26 2013-06-20 Seventh Sense Biosystems, Inc. Rapid delivery and/or receiving of fluids
WO2012021801A2 (en) 2010-08-13 2012-02-16 Seventh Sense Biosystems, Inc. Systems and techniques for monitoring subjects
EP2603256B1 (en) * 2010-08-13 2015-07-22 Seventh Sense Biosystems, Inc. Clinical and/or consumer techniques and devices
WO2012024095A2 (en) 2010-08-20 2012-02-23 Oratel Diagnostics, Llc Estrous cycle monitoring by color response
ITMI20101730A1 (en) * 2010-09-23 2012-03-24 Fond Italiana Fegato Onlus "POINT OF CARE" TYPE SYSTEM OF MEASURING TOTAL BILIRUBIN IN PLASMA, PARTICULARLY OF BABIES
JP6012052B2 (en) 2010-10-01 2016-10-25 ホロジック, インコーポレイテッドHologic, Inc. Immunoassay test strips for use in diagnostic systems
US8932234B2 (en) * 2010-10-11 2015-01-13 Bioanalytical Systems, Inc. Devices, systems, and methods for the collection of body fluids
EP2635895A1 (en) 2010-11-03 2013-09-11 Reametrix Inc. Measurement system for fluorescent detection, and method therefor
US8486717B2 (en) 2011-01-18 2013-07-16 Symbolics, Llc Lateral flow assays using two dimensional features
US8603835B2 (en) 2011-02-10 2013-12-10 Chembio Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Reduced step dual path immunoassay device and method
US8605271B2 (en) * 2011-03-25 2013-12-10 Rudolph Research Analytical Inc. Critical-angle refractometery
EP2701601B1 (en) 2011-04-29 2017-06-07 Seventh Sense Biosystems, Inc. Devices and methods for collection and/or manipulation of blood spots or other bodily fluids
US8841130B2 (en) 2011-07-11 2014-09-23 Oratel Diagnostics, Llc Methods and kit for endometriosis diagnosis
EP4062831B1 (en) 2011-08-03 2023-11-08 Intuity Medical, Inc. Body fluid sampling arrangement
CN103142222B (en) * 2011-12-07 2015-02-25 北京倍肯恒业科技发展有限责任公司 Digitized cardiovascular and cerebrovascular disease early diagnosis system
EP2795339B1 (en) 2011-12-23 2018-12-12 Abbott Point of Care Inc. Optical assay device with pneumatic sample actuation
EP2795328B1 (en) 2011-12-23 2019-05-01 Abbott Point of Care Inc. Integrated test device for optical and electrochemical assays
EP3418397B1 (en) 2012-01-24 2020-10-07 CD Diagnostics, Inc. System for detecting infection in synovial fluid
JP6231999B2 (en) 2012-03-01 2017-11-15 クイデル コーポレーション Interactive testing device and apparatus having timing mechanism
WO2013131057A1 (en) 2012-03-01 2013-09-06 Quidel Corporation System and apparatus for point-of-care diagnostics
RU2652441C2 (en) 2012-03-16 2018-04-26 Стат-Диагностика Энд Инновэйшн, С.Л. Test cartridge with integrated transfer module
CN103389372B (en) * 2012-05-08 2016-02-24 艾博生物医药(杭州)有限公司 A kind of test strips being applicable to electronic reading out device and reading
US9874556B2 (en) 2012-07-18 2018-01-23 Symbolics, Llc Lateral flow assays using two dimensional features
US9310300B2 (en) * 2012-08-03 2016-04-12 Ingeneron Incorporated Compact portable apparatus for optical assay
US20160282343A1 (en) * 2012-08-15 2016-09-29 Immunolab LLC Quantitative lateral flow assay strips for quantitative analysis of an analyte, kits containing such strips and methods of manufacture and use of same
US20140072959A1 (en) 2012-09-12 2014-03-13 Force Diagnostics, Inc. Rapid tests for insurance underwriting
DE102013001699A1 (en) * 2013-02-01 2014-08-07 Euroimmun Medizinische Labordiagnostika Ag Method and device for diagnosing a nasopharyngeal carcinoma
GB201302346D0 (en) * 2013-02-11 2013-03-27 Epistem Ltd Sample preparation paper cartridge
DE102013101888B4 (en) * 2013-02-26 2015-05-28 opTricon Entwicklungsgesellschaft für Optische Technologien mbH Device for optical analysis of a test strip
CA2902484C (en) 2013-02-26 2021-05-18 Astute Medical, Inc. Lateral flow assay with test strip retainer
ES2754402T3 (en) 2013-04-01 2020-04-17 Becton Dickinson Co Methods and kits for the diagnosis of influenza virus
JP2016522070A (en) 2013-06-21 2016-07-28 インテュイティ メディカル インコーポレイテッド Analyte monitoring system using audible feedback
US10180400B2 (en) 2013-08-20 2019-01-15 Optricon Entwicklungsgesellschaft Fur Optische Technologien Mbh Device for digital reading of quick tests
CN108051590B (en) 2013-09-13 2020-12-11 Symbolics有限责任公司 Lateral flow assay using two-dimensional test and control signal readout modes
US11008631B2 (en) * 2013-10-22 2021-05-18 Ilex Medical Ltd. Kit and method for collecting body fluid for medical diagnosis
CN103675268A (en) * 2013-11-14 2014-03-26 成都领御生物技术有限公司 Test strip card
CN103575920B (en) * 2013-11-14 2014-12-17 宋筱亮 Full-automatic genital tract infection detection system
WO2015085189A1 (en) 2013-12-06 2015-06-11 Quidel Corporation Method for reducing analyzer variability using a normalization target
CA2937975A1 (en) * 2014-01-27 2015-07-30 Brevitest Technologies, Llc Discontinuous fluidic systems for point-of-care analyte measurement
RU2688222C2 (en) * 2014-03-07 2019-05-21 Асцензия Диабетс Кэар Холдингс АГ Systems and methods of encoding biosensor calibration
MX2016012881A (en) 2014-04-02 2017-05-10 Chembio Diagnostic Systems Inc Immunoassay utilizing trapping conjugate.
WO2015187323A1 (en) * 2014-06-04 2015-12-10 Gyrus Acmi, Inc. D.B.A. Olympus Surgical Technologies America Illumination balancing and solid state narrow band imaging utilizing fiber bundle design and assembly techniques in endoscopes
JP6397939B2 (en) * 2014-06-09 2018-09-26 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Assay apparatus and target analyte detection method
US20160116466A1 (en) 2014-10-27 2016-04-28 Chembio Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Rapid Screening Assay for Qualitative Detection of Multiple Febrile Illnesses
US10324089B2 (en) 2014-12-11 2019-06-18 Critical Care Diagnostics, Inc. Test apparatus and methods for ST2 cardiac biomarker
CN110568193A (en) * 2014-12-11 2019-12-13 重症监护诊断股份有限公司 test device and method for ST2 cardiac biomarkers
US10079073B2 (en) 2014-12-11 2018-09-18 Critical Care Diagnostics, Inc. Test apparatus and methods for ST2 cardiac biomarker
DE102014226381A1 (en) * 2014-12-18 2016-06-23 Robert Bosch Gmbh Holding device, system and method for optically reading a test strip
CN107667290A (en) 2015-04-06 2018-02-06 Blu诊断有限公司 For detecting the detection means and application method of the analyte in saliva sample
US10033912B2 (en) * 2015-06-24 2018-07-24 Hunan Ehome Health Technology Company Limited Cassette attachment device for detecting intensity of test strip cassette
CN108136051A (en) 2015-08-04 2018-06-08 Cd诊断股份有限公司 The method for detecting bad local organization reaction (ALTR) necrosis
WO2017041030A1 (en) 2015-09-04 2017-03-09 The Regents Of The University Of California Methods and devices for analyte collection, extraction, concentration, and detection for clinical applications
EP3153230A1 (en) * 2015-10-08 2017-04-12 The Provost, Fellows, Foundation Scholars, & the other members of Board, of the College of Holy and Undiv. Trinity of Queen Elizabeth near Dublin A method for the production of poly(methyl methacrylate) (pmma) membranes and uses thereof
CN105814618A (en) * 2015-11-27 2016-07-27 株式会社小松制作所 Control system for mining machine, mining machine, management system for mining machine, and management method for mining machine
DE102016202428B4 (en) * 2016-02-17 2018-06-21 Axagarius Gmbh & Co. Kg Measuring system for colorimetric assays
WO2017147186A1 (en) 2016-02-22 2017-08-31 Ursure, Inc. System and method for detecting therapeutic agents to monitor adherence to a treatment regimen
JP6168580B1 (en) * 2016-02-24 2017-07-26 積水メディカル株式会社 Detection method of oncofetal fibronectin using immunochromatography
US20190056390A1 (en) * 2016-02-24 2019-02-21 Sekisui Medical Co., Ltd. Method for detecting oncofetal fibronectin using immunochromatography
KR102378607B1 (en) * 2016-04-29 2022-03-24 배비스 인코포레이티드 Birth point system and device, biochemical cartridge, and methods for newborn screening
EP3504551A1 (en) 2016-08-23 2019-07-03 Qoolabs, Inc. Lateral flow assay for assessing recombinant protein expression or reporter gene expression
US10576475B2 (en) 2016-09-15 2020-03-03 Genprime, Inc. Diagnostic assay strip cassette
US10121103B2 (en) * 2016-12-09 2018-11-06 Cisco Technologies, Inc. Scalable deep learning video analytics
US11474034B2 (en) * 2017-03-13 2022-10-18 Zoetis Services Llc Lateral flow test system
WO2018183211A1 (en) 2017-03-27 2018-10-04 The Regents Of The University Of California Semi-quantitative lateral-flow immunoassay for the detection of csf leaks
BR112019019630A2 (en) 2017-05-19 2020-04-14 Philip Morris Products Sa diagnostic test to distinguish a subject's smoking status
EP3635400A4 (en) * 2017-05-31 2021-02-24 The Regents of The University of California Single-step atps enhanced lfa diagnostic design
US11391748B2 (en) * 2017-09-21 2022-07-19 Becton, Dickinson And Company High dynamic range assays in hazardous contaminant testing
WO2019060264A1 (en) 2017-09-21 2019-03-28 Becton, Dickinson And Company Hazardous contaminant collection kit and rapid testing
US11360001B2 (en) * 2017-09-21 2022-06-14 Becton, Dickinson And Company Reactive demarcation template for hazardous contaminant testing
US11002642B2 (en) 2017-09-21 2021-05-11 Becton, Dickinson And Company Demarcation template for hazardous contaminant testing
CN209624606U (en) 2017-09-21 2019-11-12 贝克顿·迪金森公司 Dangerous contamination detection system
NL2020386B1 (en) * 2018-02-06 2019-08-14 Labonovum B V Device for collecting a sample of blood.
WO2019173283A1 (en) 2018-03-05 2019-09-12 Marquette University Method and apparatus for non-invasive hemoglobin level prediction
CN110514648B (en) * 2018-05-21 2024-10-18 科美博阳诊断技术(上海)有限公司 Chemiluminescent analysis POCT detection device and application thereof
US10605741B2 (en) 2018-06-28 2020-03-31 International Business Machines Corporation Accurate colorimetric based test strip reader system
CN109259965A (en) * 2018-09-29 2019-01-25 重庆大学 Adaptive medical POCT system and detection method
MA51798B1 (en) 2018-12-10 2022-01-31 Hoffmann La Roche METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING THE CONCENTRATION OF AN ANALYTE IN A SAMPLE OF A BODY FLUID AND METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING A SOFTWARE IMPLEMENTED MODULE
JP7479385B2 (en) 2019-01-28 2024-05-08 ベクトン・ディキンソン・アンド・カンパニー Hazardous Contaminant Sampling Device with Integrated Swab and Testing Device - Patent application
KR102241251B1 (en) * 2019-07-26 2021-04-16 주식회사 수젠텍 Multiplexing blot assay automation system
US11733170B2 (en) 2019-08-07 2023-08-22 International Business Machines Corporation Optical sensor system for quantitative colorimetric liquid analysis
FR3100890B1 (en) * 2019-09-17 2024-02-16 Innopsys Method and portable reader for analyzing biological fluid samples
US20230003722A1 (en) * 2019-11-19 2023-01-05 Ivd Vision, Llc Methods and compositions for lateral flow analyte assays
MA53878B1 (en) 2019-11-25 2023-02-28 Hoffmann La Roche Method for determining a concentration of an analyte in a bodily fluid
WO2021209576A1 (en) * 2020-04-16 2021-10-21 Senova Gesellschaft für Biowissenschaft und Technik mbH Lateral flow assay
US12055479B2 (en) * 2020-08-28 2024-08-06 Mireya C. Aronowitz Tricorder reflectometer for lateral flow immunological tests
USD939105S1 (en) 2020-09-02 2021-12-21 Cellex, Inc. Testing cassette
US20230324422A1 (en) * 2020-09-03 2023-10-12 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. Diagnostic analyzer having a dual-purpose imager
US11011278B1 (en) 2020-09-21 2021-05-18 Biolytical Laboratories Inc. Methods and rapid test kits facilitating epidemiological surveillance
WO2022226227A1 (en) * 2021-04-21 2022-10-27 Cedars-Sinai Medical Center Deep neural networks for predicting post-operative outcomes
CN113486900B (en) * 2021-05-28 2024-06-07 杭州微策生物技术股份有限公司 Embedded real-time image acquisition and processing system for POCT
IL314686A (en) * 2022-02-11 2024-10-01 Hoffmann La Roche Methods and devices for performing an analytical measurement
CN115078713B (en) * 2022-05-16 2023-07-18 远大医药(中国)有限公司 Kit, trusted detection result acquisition method and anti-counterfeiting test paper
CN117571979B (en) * 2024-01-15 2024-03-19 佳木斯大学 Premature rupture detection kit for fetal membranes for obstetrics and gynecology department

Citations (95)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3734630A (en) * 1971-09-09 1973-05-22 Logetronics Inc Copy density reading and exposure control system
US4197088A (en) * 1977-09-23 1980-04-08 Akro-Medic Engineering, Inc. Method for qualitative and quantitative determination of immunological reactions
US4264560A (en) * 1979-12-26 1981-04-28 Samuel Natelson Clinical analytical system
US4267261A (en) * 1971-07-15 1981-05-12 Energy Conversion Devices, Inc. Method for full format imaging
US4268173A (en) * 1977-12-22 1981-05-19 Direct Power Limited Reflectometers
US4372682A (en) * 1980-03-22 1983-02-08 Clinicon Mannheim Gmbh Medical test strip holding device
US4373932A (en) * 1980-01-11 1983-02-15 Akzona Incorporated Application of water-dispersible hydrophobic dyes or pigments as labels in immunoassays
US4379224A (en) * 1981-05-26 1983-04-05 Honeywell Inc. Apparatus for interpreting Code 39 bar code data
US4379225A (en) * 1980-07-03 1983-04-05 Kontes Glass Company Fiberoptic head with fiber bundles having different numerical apertures
US4436826A (en) * 1981-10-21 1984-03-13 Wang Associates Tagged immunoassay
US4438327A (en) * 1982-04-21 1984-03-20 Burr-Brown Research Corporation Bar code reading system and method
US4511259A (en) * 1982-05-28 1985-04-16 Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha Bar code input electronic timepiece
US4523853A (en) * 1981-09-30 1985-06-18 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Medical test reaction area reflected light photometric device
US4637985A (en) * 1982-09-27 1987-01-20 Internationale Octrooi Maatschappij "Octropa" B.V. Assay processes and materials therefor
US4647544A (en) * 1984-06-25 1987-03-03 Nicoli David F Immunoassay using optical interference detection
US4659229A (en) * 1984-10-10 1987-04-21 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Readhead with reduced height sensitivity
US4666309A (en) * 1982-07-14 1987-05-19 Compur-Electronic Gmbh Head for measuring reflectance
US4676653A (en) * 1984-03-02 1987-06-30 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Apparatus for determining the diffuse reflectivity of a sample surface of small dimensions
US4738823A (en) * 1985-08-30 1988-04-19 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Test strip with adjustable sample absorption capacity
US4742011A (en) * 1984-03-15 1988-05-03 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Devices for carrying out chemical and clinical tests, and their use
US4748042A (en) * 1987-03-31 1988-05-31 V-Tech, Inc. Method and apparatus for imprinting membranes with patterns of antibody
US4795036A (en) * 1987-06-15 1989-01-03 Williams Patent Crusher And Pulverizer Company Rotary disc screen conveyor apparatus
US4803048A (en) * 1987-04-02 1989-02-07 Nason Frederic L Laboratory kit
USD299860S (en) * 1986-09-02 1989-02-14 Pacific Biotech, Inc. Reaction unit for use in analyzing biological fluids
USD300463S (en) * 1986-06-30 1989-03-28 Murex Corporation Diagnostic tester for biological fluids
US4818677A (en) * 1987-12-03 1989-04-04 Monoclonal Antibodies, Inc. Membrane assay using focused sample application
US4820489A (en) * 1982-12-23 1989-04-11 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Test strips and a process for the production thereof
US4820491A (en) * 1984-09-11 1989-04-11 Miles, Inc. Reagent test strip reading instrument
US4826659A (en) * 1986-09-03 1989-05-02 Fuji Film Co., Ltd. Apparatus for feed-in and ejection of chemical analysis slide
US4838697A (en) * 1986-08-05 1989-06-13 Fritz Kurandt Apparatus for rapid colorimetry on different samples
US4894326A (en) * 1986-04-09 1990-01-16 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Monoclonal antibody defining oncofetal structure of fibronectin
US4902629A (en) * 1987-10-06 1990-02-20 Personal Diagnostics, Inc. Apparatus and processes for facilitating reaction between analyte and test reagent system
US4907857A (en) * 1988-07-25 1990-03-13 Abbott Laboratories Optical fiber distribution system for an optical fiber sensor
US4916056A (en) * 1986-02-18 1990-04-10 Abbott Laboratories Solid-phase analytical device and method for using same
US4918025A (en) * 1987-03-03 1990-04-17 Pb Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Self contained immunoassay element
US4920046A (en) * 1987-02-20 1990-04-24 Becton, Dickinson And Company Process, test device, and test kit for a rapid assay having a visible readout
US4919889A (en) * 1988-09-15 1990-04-24 Aspen Diagnostics Corporation Sample collection and transport fluid composition
US4981786A (en) * 1987-09-04 1991-01-01 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Multiple port assay device
US5006474A (en) * 1987-12-16 1991-04-09 Disease Detection International Inc. Bi-directional lateral chromatographic test device
US5008080A (en) * 1985-10-04 1991-04-16 Abbott Laboratories Solid-phase analytical device and method for using same
US5079171A (en) * 1988-09-15 1992-01-07 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Determining pregnancy induced hypertension and eclampsia by immunoassay of cellular fibronectin
US5087556A (en) * 1989-05-17 1992-02-11 Actimed Laboratories, Inc. Method for quantitative analysis of body fluid constituents
US5094955A (en) * 1988-03-15 1992-03-10 Akzo N.V. Device and method for detecting microorganisms
US5096830A (en) * 1987-11-17 1992-03-17 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Preterm labor and membrane rupture test
US5100805A (en) * 1989-01-26 1992-03-31 Seradyn, Inc. Quantitative immunoassay system and method for agglutination assays
US5104811A (en) * 1986-12-19 1992-04-14 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Test carrier and method for the analytical determination of components of body fluids
US5179288A (en) * 1991-09-30 1993-01-12 Ortho Pharmaceutical Corporation Apparatus and method for measuring a bodily constituent
US5179005A (en) * 1986-08-13 1993-01-12 Lifescan, Inc. Minimum procedure system for the determination of analytes
US5182216A (en) * 1987-01-22 1993-01-26 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Assays and devices therefor
US5185270A (en) * 1987-11-17 1993-02-09 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Fetal fibronectin pregnancy test
US5185127A (en) * 1989-09-21 1993-02-09 Becton, Dickinson And Company Test device including flow control means
US5192856A (en) * 1990-11-19 1993-03-09 An Con Genetics, Inc. Auto focusing bar code reader
US5198369A (en) * 1990-04-25 1993-03-30 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Sample measuring method using agglomeration reaction of microcarriers
US5198340A (en) * 1991-01-17 1993-03-30 Genentech, Inc. Assay for free igf-i, igf-ii, and gh levels in body fluids
US5202268A (en) * 1988-12-30 1993-04-13 Environmental Diagnostics, Inc. Multi-layered test card for the determination of substances in liquids
US5275785A (en) * 1987-10-30 1994-01-04 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Test device for detecting an analyte in a liquid sample
US5281395A (en) * 1990-12-27 1994-01-25 Boehringer Manheim Gmbh Test carrier analysis system
US5281522A (en) * 1988-09-15 1994-01-25 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Reagents and kits for determination of fetal fibronectin in a vaginal sample
US5288648A (en) * 1989-12-01 1994-02-22 Sangstat Medical Corporation Multiwell stat test
US5299284A (en) * 1990-04-09 1994-03-29 Arizona Board Of Regents, Acting On Behalf Of Arizona State University Pattern classification using linear programming
US5301681A (en) * 1991-09-27 1994-04-12 Deban Abdou F Device for detecting cancerous and precancerous conditions in a breast
US5304786A (en) * 1990-01-05 1994-04-19 Symbol Technologies, Inc. High density two-dimensional bar code symbol
US5306622A (en) * 1987-05-29 1994-04-26 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Heterogeneous immunoassay process
US5316727A (en) * 1989-09-08 1994-05-31 Terumo Kabushiki Kaisha Measuring apparatus
US5392403A (en) * 1991-04-29 1995-02-21 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Circuit arrangement employing a microprocessor module for data conversion in a data transmission between a personal computer and communication equipment
US5408535A (en) * 1993-09-07 1995-04-18 Miles Inc. Video test strip reader and method for evaluating test strips
US5415994A (en) * 1993-08-02 1995-05-16 Quidel Corporation Lateral flow medical diagnostic assay device with sample extraction means
US5481481A (en) * 1992-11-23 1996-01-02 Architectural Engergy Corporation Automated diagnostic system having temporally coordinated wireless sensors
US5496702A (en) * 1994-09-01 1996-03-05 Johnson & Johnson Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. Immunoassay elements having stable leuco dye coatings
US5500375A (en) * 1993-04-13 1996-03-19 Serex, Inc. Integrated packaging-holder device for immunochromatographic assays in flow-through or dipstick formats
US5516702A (en) * 1991-11-06 1996-05-14 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Screening method for identifying women at increased risk for imminent delivery
USD369868S (en) * 1995-01-31 1996-05-14 Carter-Wallace, Inc. Immunoassay test cartridge
US5590665A (en) * 1991-12-27 1997-01-07 Toa Medical Electronics Company, Ltd. Method of diagnosing cerebral infarction
US5591645A (en) * 1987-03-27 1997-01-07 Becton, Dickinson & Co. Solid phase chromatographic immunoassay
US5594637A (en) * 1993-05-26 1997-01-14 Base Ten Systems, Inc. System and method for assessing medical risk
US5598007A (en) * 1994-03-21 1997-01-28 Intermec Corporation Symbology reader with fixed focus spotter beam
US5597532A (en) * 1994-10-20 1997-01-28 Connolly; James Apparatus for determining substances contained in a body fluid
US5597700A (en) * 1994-04-28 1997-01-28 California Research, Llc Method for detecting free insulin-like growth-factor-binding protein 1 and a test device for detecting the ruptures of fetal membranes using the above method
US5602040A (en) * 1987-04-27 1997-02-11 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Assays
US5621204A (en) * 1995-05-30 1997-04-15 Opticon Inc Low power bar code reader
US5622171A (en) * 1990-08-28 1997-04-22 Arch Development Corporation Method and system for differential diagnosis based on clinical and radiological information using artificial neural networks
US5622871A (en) * 1987-04-27 1997-04-22 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Capillary immunoassay and device therefor comprising mobilizable particulate labelled reagents
US5623939A (en) * 1994-05-19 1997-04-29 Board Of Regents, University Of Texas System Method and apparatus for analyzing uterine electrical activity from surface measurements for obstetrical diagnosis
US5627907A (en) * 1994-12-01 1997-05-06 University Of Pittsburgh Computerized detection of masses and microcalcifications in digital mammograms
US5715182A (en) * 1993-08-19 1998-02-03 Hitachi, Ltd. Device for the classification and examination of particles in fluid
USD390667S (en) * 1997-04-08 1998-02-10 Carter-Wallace, Inc. Diagnostic detection device
US5723868A (en) * 1995-05-15 1998-03-03 Welch Allyn, Inc. Illuminating assembly for use with bar code readers
US5741462A (en) * 1995-04-25 1998-04-21 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories
US5751629A (en) * 1995-04-25 1998-05-12 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories
US5874214A (en) * 1995-04-25 1999-02-23 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories
US5878746A (en) * 1993-08-25 1999-03-09 Lemelson; Jerome H. Computerized medical diagnostic system
US6017496A (en) * 1995-06-07 2000-01-25 Irori Matrices with memories and uses thereof
US6025129A (en) * 1995-04-25 2000-02-15 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories and uses thereof
US6394952B1 (en) * 1998-02-03 2002-05-28 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Point of care diagnostic systems
US20030004906A1 (en) * 1996-02-09 2003-01-02 Jerome Lapointe Method for selecting medical and biochemical diagnostic tests using neural network-related applications

Family Cites Families (108)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3600099A (en) 1970-04-07 1971-08-17 Schoeffel Instrument Corp Thin layer chromatographic apparatus for comparing a sample and a reference
US3762817A (en) 1972-02-23 1973-10-02 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Spectral densitometer
US3924948A (en) 1973-12-17 1975-12-09 Kontes Glass Co Densitometer for use in quantitative thin layer chromatographic analysis
US3905767A (en) 1974-01-30 1975-09-16 Miles Lab Process for qualitative analysis or quantitation of antigens or antibodies
JPS59779B2 (en) 1977-01-20 1984-01-09 株式会社京都第一科学 Analysis method for urine etc.
US4225575A (en) 1978-05-15 1980-09-30 Ventrex Laboratories, Inc. Method and apparatus for performing in vitro clinical diagnostic tests using a solid phase assay system
US4400353A (en) 1977-09-23 1983-08-23 Akro-Medic Engineering, Inc. Electro-optical system for use in evaluating immunological reactions
US4160008A (en) 1978-01-26 1979-07-03 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Multilayered test device for determining the presence of a liquid sample component, and method of use
US4276261A (en) * 1979-07-16 1981-06-30 The Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company Polymerization apparatus and process
US4366241A (en) 1980-08-07 1982-12-28 Syva Company Concentrating zone method in heterogeneous immunoassays
US4716123A (en) 1981-01-14 1987-12-29 Covalent Technology Corporation Solid phase biological diagnostic assay via visual observation as enhanced by Mie scattering
US5073484A (en) 1982-03-09 1991-12-17 Bio-Metric Systems, Inc. Quantitative analysis apparatus and method
US4537861A (en) 1983-02-03 1985-08-27 Elings Virgil B Apparatus and method for homogeneous immunoassay
US4552839A (en) 1983-08-01 1985-11-12 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Determination of analytes in particle-containing medium
US4552458A (en) 1983-10-11 1985-11-12 Eastman Kodak Company Compact reflectometer
US4703017C1 (en) 1984-02-14 2001-12-04 Becton Dickinson Co Solid phase assay with visual readout
US4695554A (en) 1984-02-14 1987-09-22 Becton Dickinson And Company Sac or liposome containing dye (sulforhodamine) for immunoassay
US5132206A (en) 1984-06-11 1992-07-21 Dreyer William J Fluorescent pigments for tagging biological molecules
US5075215A (en) 1984-06-11 1991-12-24 Dreyer William J Use of daylight fluorescent pigments for tagging biological molecules
US5055261A (en) 1984-09-11 1991-10-08 Miles Inc. Reagent test strip reading instrument
DE3445816C1 (en) 1984-12-15 1986-06-12 Behringwerke Ag, 3550 Marburg Flat diagnostic agent
US4782511A (en) 1986-07-11 1988-11-01 Murex Corporation Interactive medical laboratory specimen apparatus system
US4857457A (en) 1986-07-24 1989-08-15 Shamsuddin Abulkalam M Screening test for large intestinal cancer
US5059394A (en) 1986-08-13 1991-10-22 Lifescan, Inc. Analytical device for the automated determination of analytes in fluids
DE3630777A1 (en) 1986-09-10 1988-03-24 Hoechst Ag DEVICE FOR EVALUATING TEST STRIPS
US4960691A (en) 1986-09-29 1990-10-02 Abbott Laboratories Chromatographic test strip for determining ligands or receptors
CA1305921C (en) 1987-01-30 1992-08-04 Eric K. Gustafson Diffraction immunoassay and reagents
US5132097A (en) 1987-02-11 1992-07-21 G.D. Research Apparatus for analysis of specific binding complexes
US5047206A (en) 1987-03-11 1991-09-10 Wayne State University Reagent test strip
US4855240A (en) 1987-05-13 1989-08-08 Becton Dickinson And Company Solid phase assay employing capillary flow
US4943522A (en) 1987-06-01 1990-07-24 Quidel Lateral flow, non-bibulous membrane assay protocols
US5120643A (en) 1987-07-13 1992-06-09 Abbott Laboratories Process for immunochromatography with colloidal particles
US4868767A (en) 1987-07-30 1989-09-19 Cerex Corporation Reflectance gradient densitometer
IT1223295B (en) * 1987-08-14 1990-09-19 Boehringer Biochemia Srl IMMUNODIAGNOSTIC DEVICE AND METHOD
DE8711788U1 (en) * 1987-09-01 1987-10-22 Drägerwerk AG, 2400 Lübeck Colorimetric dosimeter with different display sensitivity
US4874691A (en) 1987-10-16 1989-10-17 Quadra Logic Technologies Inc. Membrane-supported immunoassays
US5223440A (en) 1987-11-17 1993-06-29 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Ex vivo product of conception test to determine abortion
DE8716270U1 (en) 1987-12-09 1988-02-18 LRE Relais + Elektronik GmbH, 8000 München Device, in particular for examining the cholesterol content of blood
US4928254A (en) * 1988-04-28 1990-05-22 Knudsen Arne K Laser flash thermal conductivity apparatus and method
US5089387A (en) 1988-07-07 1992-02-18 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Dna probe diffraction assay and reagents
US4962154A (en) 1988-07-14 1990-10-09 The Dow Chemical Company Latex-antigen-antibody complexes for immunoassay
US5252459A (en) 1988-09-23 1993-10-12 Abbott Laboratories Indicator reagents, diagnostic assays and test kits employing organic polymer latex particles
US5236846A (en) 1988-11-18 1993-08-17 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Ectopic pregnancy test
DE3842702A1 (en) 1988-12-19 1990-06-21 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh TEST CARRIER FOR ANALYTICAL EXAMINATION OF A SAMPLING LIQUID WITH THE AID OF A SPECIFIC BINDING REACTION OF TWO BIOAFFIN BINDING PARTNERS AND A CORRESPONDING TEST PROCEDURE
US5073342A (en) 1989-01-05 1991-12-17 Eastman Kodak Company Reciprocating transfer mechanism
US5118183A (en) 1989-02-10 1992-06-02 X-Rite, Incorporated Automated strip reader densitometer
CA2010165A1 (en) 1989-03-13 1990-09-13 Richard L. Hurtle Compact semi-programmable device for reading reagent test strips and method relating thereto
US5036479A (en) 1989-04-20 1991-07-30 Trw Inc. Modular automated avionics test system
US5120662A (en) 1989-05-09 1992-06-09 Abbott Laboratories Multilayer solid phase immunoassay support and method of use
US5147609A (en) 1989-05-19 1992-09-15 Pb Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Assay element
US4945250A (en) 1989-07-12 1990-07-31 Pb Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Optical read head for immunoassay instrument
DE3940152A1 (en) 1989-12-05 1991-06-06 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh TEST STRIP EVALUATOR FOR MULTIPLE TEST STRIPS
US5243655A (en) 1990-01-05 1993-09-07 Symbol Technologies Inc. System for encoding and decoding data in machine readable graphic form
USD328135S (en) 1990-01-12 1992-07-21 Pacific Biotech, Inc. Reaction unit for use in analyzing biological fluids
US5249259A (en) 1990-01-23 1993-09-28 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Genetic algorithm technique for designing neural networks
US5141850A (en) 1990-02-07 1992-08-25 Hygeia Sciences, Inc. Porous strip form assay device method
DE4012216A1 (en) 1990-04-14 1991-10-17 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh TEST CARRIER FOR THE ANALYSIS OF LIQUIDS
IE911670A1 (en) 1990-05-17 1991-11-20 Adeza Biomedical Corp Highly reflective biogratings and method
US5157733A (en) 1990-06-08 1992-10-20 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Radiation image processing apparatus, determination apparatus, and radiation image read-out apparatus
US5251626A (en) 1990-07-03 1993-10-12 Telectronics Pacing Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for the detection and treatment of arrhythmias using a neural network
US5147606A (en) 1990-08-06 1992-09-15 Miles Inc. Self-metering fluid analysis device
US5135160A (en) 1990-08-17 1992-08-04 Opticon, Inc. Portable bar code reader utilizing pulsed LED array
US5130936A (en) 1990-09-14 1992-07-14 Arinc Research Corporation Method and apparatus for diagnostic testing including a neural network for determining testing sufficiency
US5227893A (en) 1990-10-31 1993-07-13 International Business Machines Corporation Pseudo-bar code control of image transmission
US5177565A (en) * 1991-02-11 1993-01-05 United Medical Manufacturing Company Reflectance measurement apparatus with noise reduction circuitry
IT1246676B (en) 1991-02-21 1994-11-24 Seac Srl IMMUNOLOGICAL ANALYSIS EQUIPMENT.
US5246858A (en) 1991-02-27 1993-09-21 Boehringer Mannheim Corporation Apparatus and method for analyzing a body fluid
US5331550A (en) 1991-03-05 1994-07-19 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Application of neural networks as an aid in medical diagnosis and general anomaly detection
US5648274A (en) 1991-05-29 1997-07-15 Smithkline Diagnostics, Inc. Competitive immunoassay device
US5686315A (en) 1991-06-14 1997-11-11 Quidel Corporation Assay device for one step detection of analyte
USD342575S (en) 1991-09-26 1993-12-21 Fujirebio Kabushiki Kaisha Receptacle for blood sample analyzing
WO1993009432A1 (en) 1991-11-04 1993-05-13 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Screening method for identifying women at increased risk for imminent delivery
US5262625A (en) 1991-11-15 1993-11-16 Ncr Corporation Multiple bar code decoding system and method
PL167791B1 (en) 1992-02-25 1995-11-30 Marek Klimek Apparatus for determining an optimum delivery time for pregnant women
USD341663S (en) 1992-03-06 1993-11-23 Hygeia Sciences, Inc. Immunoassay test cartridge
US5223219A (en) 1992-04-10 1993-06-29 Biotrack, Inc. Analytical cartridge and system for detecting analytes in liquid samples
US5279941A (en) * 1992-06-12 1994-01-18 Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Determination of endometrial receptivity toward embryo implantation
US5321492A (en) 1992-08-07 1994-06-14 Miles Inc. Dual function readhead for a reflectance instrument
GB9217864D0 (en) 1992-08-21 1992-10-07 Unilever Plc Monitoring method
JPH06274660A (en) 1993-03-18 1994-09-30 Hitachi Ltd Recognizing or diagnosing method
US5354692A (en) 1992-09-08 1994-10-11 Pacific Biotech, Inc. Analyte detection device including a hydrophobic barrier for improved fluid flow
DE4310583A1 (en) 1993-03-31 1994-10-06 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Test strip analysis system
US5473537A (en) 1993-07-30 1995-12-05 Psychresources Development Company Method for evaluating and reviewing a patient's condition
US5537590A (en) * 1993-08-05 1996-07-16 Amado; Armando Apparatus for applying analysis rules to data sets in a relational database to generate a database of diagnostic records linked to the data sets
AU7563294A (en) * 1993-08-24 1995-03-21 Metrika Laboratories, Inc. Novel disposable electronic assay device
US5455890A (en) 1993-09-30 1995-10-03 Motorola, Inc. Method for structuring an expert system utilizing one or more neural networks
US5457313A (en) 1994-02-01 1995-10-10 The United States Of America As Represented By The United States Department Of Energy. Fiber optic detector and method for using same for detecting chemical species
US5658801A (en) 1994-05-03 1997-08-19 Spectral Diagnostics Inc. Medical test kit
USD361842S (en) 1994-05-23 1995-08-29 Carter Wallace, Inc. Immunoassay test cartridge
DE4425432A1 (en) 1994-07-19 1996-01-25 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Evaluation device for reflectometric evaluation of test elements
CA2156226C (en) 1994-08-25 1999-02-23 Takayuki Taguchi Biological fluid analyzing device and method
US5526120A (en) * 1994-09-08 1996-06-11 Lifescan, Inc. Test strip with an asymmetrical end insuring correct insertion for measuring
USD379662S (en) 1994-09-23 1997-06-03 Unipath Limited Combined testing instrument and cap
USD379663S (en) 1994-09-23 1997-06-03 Unipath Limited Testing instrument
USD380554S (en) 1994-12-12 1997-07-01 Medix Biotech, Inc. Transparent assay tester for biological fluids with a magnification lens
USD375799S (en) 1994-12-12 1996-11-19 Leiva William A Transparent assay tester for biological fluids with a fresnel lens
US5668017A (en) 1995-02-10 1997-09-16 Path Radial absorption device
USD384164S (en) 1995-04-06 1997-09-23 Medix Biotech, Inc. Transparent assay tester for biological fluids
US5701181A (en) 1995-05-12 1997-12-23 Bayer Corporation Fiber optic diffuse light reflectance sensor utilized in the detection of occult blood
US5656502A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-08-12 Diagnostic Chemicals Limited Test strip holder and method of use
US5687716A (en) * 1995-11-15 1997-11-18 Kaufmann; Peter Selective differentiating diagnostic process based on broad data bases
USD383550S (en) 1996-02-09 1997-09-09 Lifescan, Inc. Reagent test strip
USD383549S (en) 1996-04-01 1997-09-09 Warner-Lambert Company Pregnancy tester
US5877486A (en) * 1996-10-11 1999-03-02 Intermec Ip Corp. Method and apparatus for enhancing resolution of reflectance signals produced from machine-readable symbols
US5945341A (en) * 1996-10-21 1999-08-31 Bayer Corporation System for the optical identification of coding on a diagnostic test strip
US5877863A (en) * 1997-03-20 1999-03-02 Bayer Corporation Readhead for a photometric diagnostic instrument
US5985675A (en) * 1997-12-31 1999-11-16 Charm Sciences, Inc. Test device for detection of an analyte
US6574425B1 (en) * 1997-10-31 2003-06-03 Jack L. Aronowitz Reflectometer

Patent Citations (99)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4267261A (en) * 1971-07-15 1981-05-12 Energy Conversion Devices, Inc. Method for full format imaging
US3734630A (en) * 1971-09-09 1973-05-22 Logetronics Inc Copy density reading and exposure control system
US4197088A (en) * 1977-09-23 1980-04-08 Akro-Medic Engineering, Inc. Method for qualitative and quantitative determination of immunological reactions
US4268173A (en) * 1977-12-22 1981-05-19 Direct Power Limited Reflectometers
US4264560A (en) * 1979-12-26 1981-04-28 Samuel Natelson Clinical analytical system
US4373932A (en) * 1980-01-11 1983-02-15 Akzona Incorporated Application of water-dispersible hydrophobic dyes or pigments as labels in immunoassays
US4372682A (en) * 1980-03-22 1983-02-08 Clinicon Mannheim Gmbh Medical test strip holding device
US4379225A (en) * 1980-07-03 1983-04-05 Kontes Glass Company Fiberoptic head with fiber bundles having different numerical apertures
US4379224A (en) * 1981-05-26 1983-04-05 Honeywell Inc. Apparatus for interpreting Code 39 bar code data
US4523853A (en) * 1981-09-30 1985-06-18 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Medical test reaction area reflected light photometric device
US4436826A (en) * 1981-10-21 1984-03-13 Wang Associates Tagged immunoassay
US4438327A (en) * 1982-04-21 1984-03-20 Burr-Brown Research Corporation Bar code reading system and method
US4511259A (en) * 1982-05-28 1985-04-16 Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha Bar code input electronic timepiece
US4666309A (en) * 1982-07-14 1987-05-19 Compur-Electronic Gmbh Head for measuring reflectance
US4637985A (en) * 1982-09-27 1987-01-20 Internationale Octrooi Maatschappij "Octropa" B.V. Assay processes and materials therefor
US4820489A (en) * 1982-12-23 1989-04-11 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Test strips and a process for the production thereof
US4676653A (en) * 1984-03-02 1987-06-30 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Apparatus for determining the diffuse reflectivity of a sample surface of small dimensions
US4742011A (en) * 1984-03-15 1988-05-03 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Devices for carrying out chemical and clinical tests, and their use
US4647544A (en) * 1984-06-25 1987-03-03 Nicoli David F Immunoassay using optical interference detection
US4820491A (en) * 1984-09-11 1989-04-11 Miles, Inc. Reagent test strip reading instrument
US4659229A (en) * 1984-10-10 1987-04-21 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Readhead with reduced height sensitivity
US4738823A (en) * 1985-08-30 1988-04-19 Miles Laboratories, Inc. Test strip with adjustable sample absorption capacity
US5008080A (en) * 1985-10-04 1991-04-16 Abbott Laboratories Solid-phase analytical device and method for using same
US4916056A (en) * 1986-02-18 1990-04-10 Abbott Laboratories Solid-phase analytical device and method for using same
US4894326A (en) * 1986-04-09 1990-01-16 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Monoclonal antibody defining oncofetal structure of fibronectin
USD300463S (en) * 1986-06-30 1989-03-28 Murex Corporation Diagnostic tester for biological fluids
US4838697A (en) * 1986-08-05 1989-06-13 Fritz Kurandt Apparatus for rapid colorimetry on different samples
US5179005A (en) * 1986-08-13 1993-01-12 Lifescan, Inc. Minimum procedure system for the determination of analytes
US5304468A (en) * 1986-08-13 1994-04-19 Lifescan, Inc. Reagent test strip and apparatus for determination of blood glucose
USD299860S (en) * 1986-09-02 1989-02-14 Pacific Biotech, Inc. Reaction unit for use in analyzing biological fluids
US4826659A (en) * 1986-09-03 1989-05-02 Fuji Film Co., Ltd. Apparatus for feed-in and ejection of chemical analysis slide
US5104811A (en) * 1986-12-19 1992-04-14 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Test carrier and method for the analytical determination of components of body fluids
US5182216A (en) * 1987-01-22 1993-01-26 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Assays and devices therefor
US4920046A (en) * 1987-02-20 1990-04-24 Becton, Dickinson And Company Process, test device, and test kit for a rapid assay having a visible readout
US4918025A (en) * 1987-03-03 1990-04-17 Pb Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Self contained immunoassay element
US5591645A (en) * 1987-03-27 1997-01-07 Becton, Dickinson & Co. Solid phase chromatographic immunoassay
US4748042A (en) * 1987-03-31 1988-05-31 V-Tech, Inc. Method and apparatus for imprinting membranes with patterns of antibody
US4803048A (en) * 1987-04-02 1989-02-07 Nason Frederic L Laboratory kit
US5622871A (en) * 1987-04-27 1997-04-22 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Capillary immunoassay and device therefor comprising mobilizable particulate labelled reagents
US5602040A (en) * 1987-04-27 1997-02-11 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Assays
US5306622A (en) * 1987-05-29 1994-04-26 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh Heterogeneous immunoassay process
US4795036A (en) * 1987-06-15 1989-01-03 Williams Patent Crusher And Pulverizer Company Rotary disc screen conveyor apparatus
US4981786A (en) * 1987-09-04 1991-01-01 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Multiple port assay device
US4902629A (en) * 1987-10-06 1990-02-20 Personal Diagnostics, Inc. Apparatus and processes for facilitating reaction between analyte and test reagent system
US5275785A (en) * 1987-10-30 1994-01-04 Unilever Patent Holdings B.V. Test device for detecting an analyte in a liquid sample
US5096830A (en) * 1987-11-17 1992-03-17 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Preterm labor and membrane rupture test
US5185270A (en) * 1987-11-17 1993-02-09 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Fetal fibronectin pregnancy test
US4818677A (en) * 1987-12-03 1989-04-04 Monoclonal Antibodies, Inc. Membrane assay using focused sample application
US5006474A (en) * 1987-12-16 1991-04-09 Disease Detection International Inc. Bi-directional lateral chromatographic test device
US5094955A (en) * 1988-03-15 1992-03-10 Akzo N.V. Device and method for detecting microorganisms
US4907857A (en) * 1988-07-25 1990-03-13 Abbott Laboratories Optical fiber distribution system for an optical fiber sensor
US5079171A (en) * 1988-09-15 1992-01-07 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Determining pregnancy induced hypertension and eclampsia by immunoassay of cellular fibronectin
US5281522A (en) * 1988-09-15 1994-01-25 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Reagents and kits for determination of fetal fibronectin in a vaginal sample
US4919889A (en) * 1988-09-15 1990-04-24 Aspen Diagnostics Corporation Sample collection and transport fluid composition
US5202268A (en) * 1988-12-30 1993-04-13 Environmental Diagnostics, Inc. Multi-layered test card for the determination of substances in liquids
US5100805A (en) * 1989-01-26 1992-03-31 Seradyn, Inc. Quantitative immunoassay system and method for agglutination assays
US5087556A (en) * 1989-05-17 1992-02-11 Actimed Laboratories, Inc. Method for quantitative analysis of body fluid constituents
US5316727A (en) * 1989-09-08 1994-05-31 Terumo Kabushiki Kaisha Measuring apparatus
US5185127A (en) * 1989-09-21 1993-02-09 Becton, Dickinson And Company Test device including flow control means
US5288648A (en) * 1989-12-01 1994-02-22 Sangstat Medical Corporation Multiwell stat test
US5304786A (en) * 1990-01-05 1994-04-19 Symbol Technologies, Inc. High density two-dimensional bar code symbol
US5299284A (en) * 1990-04-09 1994-03-29 Arizona Board Of Regents, Acting On Behalf Of Arizona State University Pattern classification using linear programming
US5198369A (en) * 1990-04-25 1993-03-30 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Sample measuring method using agglomeration reaction of microcarriers
US5622171A (en) * 1990-08-28 1997-04-22 Arch Development Corporation Method and system for differential diagnosis based on clinical and radiological information using artificial neural networks
US5192856A (en) * 1990-11-19 1993-03-09 An Con Genetics, Inc. Auto focusing bar code reader
US5281395A (en) * 1990-12-27 1994-01-25 Boehringer Manheim Gmbh Test carrier analysis system
US5198340A (en) * 1991-01-17 1993-03-30 Genentech, Inc. Assay for free igf-i, igf-ii, and gh levels in body fluids
US5392403A (en) * 1991-04-29 1995-02-21 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Circuit arrangement employing a microprocessor module for data conversion in a data transmission between a personal computer and communication equipment
US5301681A (en) * 1991-09-27 1994-04-12 Deban Abdou F Device for detecting cancerous and precancerous conditions in a breast
US5179288A (en) * 1991-09-30 1993-01-12 Ortho Pharmaceutical Corporation Apparatus and method for measuring a bodily constituent
US5516702A (en) * 1991-11-06 1996-05-14 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Screening method for identifying women at increased risk for imminent delivery
US5590665A (en) * 1991-12-27 1997-01-07 Toa Medical Electronics Company, Ltd. Method of diagnosing cerebral infarction
US5481481A (en) * 1992-11-23 1996-01-02 Architectural Engergy Corporation Automated diagnostic system having temporally coordinated wireless sensors
US5500375A (en) * 1993-04-13 1996-03-19 Serex, Inc. Integrated packaging-holder device for immunochromatographic assays in flow-through or dipstick formats
US5594637A (en) * 1993-05-26 1997-01-14 Base Ten Systems, Inc. System and method for assessing medical risk
US5415994A (en) * 1993-08-02 1995-05-16 Quidel Corporation Lateral flow medical diagnostic assay device with sample extraction means
US5715182A (en) * 1993-08-19 1998-02-03 Hitachi, Ltd. Device for the classification and examination of particles in fluid
US5878746A (en) * 1993-08-25 1999-03-09 Lemelson; Jerome H. Computerized medical diagnostic system
US5408535A (en) * 1993-09-07 1995-04-18 Miles Inc. Video test strip reader and method for evaluating test strips
US5598007A (en) * 1994-03-21 1997-01-28 Intermec Corporation Symbology reader with fixed focus spotter beam
US5597700A (en) * 1994-04-28 1997-01-28 California Research, Llc Method for detecting free insulin-like growth-factor-binding protein 1 and a test device for detecting the ruptures of fetal membranes using the above method
US5623939A (en) * 1994-05-19 1997-04-29 Board Of Regents, University Of Texas System Method and apparatus for analyzing uterine electrical activity from surface measurements for obstetrical diagnosis
US5496702A (en) * 1994-09-01 1996-03-05 Johnson & Johnson Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. Immunoassay elements having stable leuco dye coatings
US5597532A (en) * 1994-10-20 1997-01-28 Connolly; James Apparatus for determining substances contained in a body fluid
US5627907A (en) * 1994-12-01 1997-05-06 University Of Pittsburgh Computerized detection of masses and microcalcifications in digital mammograms
USD369868S (en) * 1995-01-31 1996-05-14 Carter-Wallace, Inc. Immunoassay test cartridge
US5741462A (en) * 1995-04-25 1998-04-21 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories
US5751629A (en) * 1995-04-25 1998-05-12 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories
US5874214A (en) * 1995-04-25 1999-02-23 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories
US6025129A (en) * 1995-04-25 2000-02-15 Irori Remotely programmable matrices with memories and uses thereof
US5723868A (en) * 1995-05-15 1998-03-03 Welch Allyn, Inc. Illuminating assembly for use with bar code readers
US5621204A (en) * 1995-05-30 1997-04-15 Opticon Inc Low power bar code reader
US6017496A (en) * 1995-06-07 2000-01-25 Irori Matrices with memories and uses thereof
US20030004906A1 (en) * 1996-02-09 2003-01-02 Jerome Lapointe Method for selecting medical and biochemical diagnostic tests using neural network-related applications
US6678669B2 (en) * 1996-02-09 2004-01-13 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Method for selecting medical and biochemical diagnostic tests using neural network-related applications
USD390667S (en) * 1997-04-08 1998-02-10 Carter-Wallace, Inc. Diagnostic detection device
US6556977B1 (en) * 1997-08-14 2003-04-29 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Methods for selecting, developing and improving diagnostic tests for pregnancy-related conditions
US6394952B1 (en) * 1998-02-03 2002-05-28 Adeza Biomedical Corporation Point of care diagnostic systems
US6867051B1 (en) * 1998-02-03 2005-03-15 Adeza Biomedical, Inc. Point of care diagnostic systems

Cited By (83)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060094127A1 (en) * 2003-05-22 2006-05-04 Wen-Chao Tseng Method of automatically detecting a test result of a probe zone of a test strip
US7344081B2 (en) * 2003-05-22 2008-03-18 Transpacific Ip, Ltd. Method of automatically detecting a test result of a probe zone of a test strip
US20070185679A1 (en) * 2004-04-01 2007-08-09 Petruno Patrick T Indicating status of a diagnostic test system
US9989527B2 (en) 2004-04-01 2018-06-05 Alverix, Inc. Lateral flow assay systems and methods
US10191043B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2019-01-29 Alverix, Inc. Methods and systems for calibrating illumination source of diagnostic test system
US10753931B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2020-08-25 Alverix, Inc. Assay test strips with multiple labels and reading same
US10041941B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2018-08-07 Alverix, Inc. Assay test strips with multiple labels and reading same
US11782058B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2023-10-10 Alverix, Inc. Diagnostic test system using measurement obtained from reference feature to modify operational parameter of reader
US9891217B2 (en) 2005-04-22 2018-02-13 Alverix, Inc. Assay test strips with multiple labels and reading same
US20100197000A1 (en) * 2005-06-28 2010-08-05 Shi Qinwei Membrane array and analytical device
US7785865B2 (en) * 2005-06-28 2010-08-31 Zbx Corporation Membrane array and analytical device
US20080028261A1 (en) * 2005-12-19 2008-01-31 Petruno Patrick T End-of-life disabling of a diagnostic test system
US8024148B2 (en) 2005-12-19 2011-09-20 Alverix, Inc. End-of-life disabling of a diagnostic test system
WO2008115882A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-09-25 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Block verification of medical tests
KR101539016B1 (en) * 2007-10-23 2015-07-23 스카넥스 에이에스 Immunoassay analysis method
EP2215475A1 (en) * 2007-10-23 2010-08-11 Skannex AS Immunoassay analysis method
EP2215475A4 (en) * 2007-10-23 2013-12-25 Skannex As Immunoassay analysis method
US20110019883A1 (en) * 2007-10-23 2011-01-27 Dag Bremnes Immunoassay analysis method
US8824800B2 (en) * 2007-10-23 2014-09-02 Skannex As Immunoassay analysis method
US8389230B2 (en) * 2008-05-29 2013-03-05 Arkray, Inc. Immunoassay analyzer and immunoassay method
EP2295970A1 (en) * 2008-05-29 2011-03-16 ARKRAY, Inc. Immunoassay analyzer and immunoassay method
EP2295970A4 (en) * 2008-05-29 2014-07-30 Arkray Inc Immunoassay analyzer and immunoassay method
US20110076695A1 (en) * 2008-05-29 2011-03-31 Arkray, Inc. Immunoassay analyzer and immunoassay method
US20130143311A1 (en) * 2008-05-29 2013-06-06 Arkray, Inc. Immunoassay Analyzer and Immunoassay Method
US10317403B2 (en) * 2008-05-29 2019-06-11 Arkray, Inc. Immunoassay analyzer and immunoassay method
US20110293153A1 (en) * 2008-11-14 2011-12-01 Optricon Gmbh Appliance and method for evaluation and assessment of a test strip
US8848988B2 (en) * 2008-11-14 2014-09-30 Optricon Gmbh Appliance and method for evaluation and assessment of a test strip
US11385219B2 (en) 2009-01-13 2022-07-12 Fio Corporation Handheld diagnostic test device and method for use with an electronic device and a test cartridge in a rapid diagnostic test
US9805165B2 (en) 2009-01-13 2017-10-31 Fio Corporation Handheld diagnostic test device and method for use with an electronic device and a test cartridge in a rapid diagnostic test
US20120122229A1 (en) * 2009-02-13 2012-05-17 Oxtox Limited Methods of assaying for tetrahydrocannabinol
US8785204B2 (en) * 2009-02-13 2014-07-22 Oxtox Limited Methods of assaying for tetrahydrocannabinol
US9945855B2 (en) * 2010-07-20 2018-04-17 Becton, Dickinson And Company Method for linking point of care rapid diagnostic testing results to laboratory-based methods
US20130216998A1 (en) * 2010-07-20 2013-08-22 Becton, Dickinson And Company Method for linking point of care rapid diagnostic testing results to laboratory-based methods
US9026481B2 (en) * 2011-05-25 2015-05-05 Azure Vault Ltd. Remote chemical assay system
US20140113357A1 (en) * 2011-05-25 2014-04-24 Ze'ev Russak Remote chemical assay system
US9535448B2 (en) 2011-11-16 2017-01-03 Jean-Pierre Key Chromatic mainframe
EP3382391A1 (en) 2012-10-24 2018-10-03 NYU Winthrop Hospital Non-invasive biomarker to identify subjects at risk of preterm delivery
US10408838B2 (en) 2012-10-24 2019-09-10 Nyu Winthrop Hospital Non-invasive biomarker to identify subject at risk of preterm delivery
US9797903B2 (en) 2012-10-24 2017-10-24 Winthrop-University Hospital Non-invasive biomarker to identify subject at risk of preterm delivery
US11693002B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-07-04 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for variable function mobile application for providing medical test results using visual indicia to determine medical test function type
US11935657B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2024-03-19 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for a digital consumer medical wallet and storehouse
US11802868B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-10-31 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for variable function mobile application for providing medical test results
WO2018075554A1 (en) * 2016-10-17 2018-04-26 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, LLC Pregnancy test to assess disease risk
US10473659B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2019-11-12 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for immediate health assessment response system
US12009078B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2024-06-11 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for medical escalation and intervention that is a direct result of a remote diagnostic test
US10902951B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2021-01-26 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for machine learning application for providing medical test results using visual indicia
US10928390B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2021-02-23 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Medical apparatus for testing for medical conditions including zika and pregnancy
US11651866B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-05-16 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for real-time insurance quote in response to a self-diagnostic test
US11579145B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-02-14 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for image analysis of medical test results
US11567070B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2023-01-31 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for collection and dissemination of biologic sample test results data
US11107585B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2021-08-31 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc System and method for a digital consumer medical wallet and storehouse
US11468991B2 (en) 2016-10-17 2022-10-11 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for machine learning application for providing medical test results using visual indicia
US10631031B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2020-04-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for television network in response to input
US11915810B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2024-02-27 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for transmitting prescription to pharmacy using self-diagnostic test and telemedicine
US11125746B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-09-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Two-sided flow-through immunoassay
US10331924B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2019-06-25 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for audiovisual response to retail diagnostic product
US10527555B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2020-01-07 Reliant Immune Disgnostics, Inc. System and method for visual trigger to perform diagnostic test
US11164680B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-11-02 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for initiating telemedicine conference using self-diagnostic test
US11170877B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-11-09 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, LLC System and method for correlating retail testing product to medical diagnostic code
US11594337B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2023-02-28 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for advertising in response to diagnostic test results
US11867635B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2024-01-09 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for visual trigger to perform diagnostic test
US11295859B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2022-04-05 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for handing diagnostic test results to telemedicine provider
US10635870B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2020-04-28 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for audiovisual response to retail diagnostic product
US11599908B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2023-03-07 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for advertising in response to diagnostic test
US10890534B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-01-12 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for visual trigger to perform diagnostic test
US11682207B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2023-06-20 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for audiovisual response to retail diagnostic product
US11120235B2 (en) 2016-12-14 2021-09-14 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for audiovisual response to retail diagnostic product
US11333672B2 (en) 2017-09-13 2022-05-17 Progenity, Inc. Preeclampsia biomarkers and related systems and methods
US10930381B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-02-23 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Microfluidic testing system for mobile veterinary applications
US11437142B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2022-09-06 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Biofluidic triggering system and method
US11587658B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2023-02-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Communication loop and record loop system for parallel/serial dual microfluidic chip
US11041185B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-06-22 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Modular parallel/serial dual microfluidic chip
US11527324B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2022-12-13 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Artificial intelligence response system based on testing with parallel/serial dual microfluidic chip
US11605450B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2023-03-14 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Microfluidic testing system for mobile veterinary applications
US11124821B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-09-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Microfluidic testing system with cell capture/analysis regions for processing in a parallel and serial manner
US10930380B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-02-23 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Communication loop and record loop system for parallel/serial dual microfluidic chip
US11200986B2 (en) 2017-11-10 2021-12-14 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Database and machine learning in response to parallel serial dual microfluidic chip
US10636527B2 (en) 2018-06-06 2020-04-28 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for quantifying, ensuring, and triggering the prescriptive authority for a telemedicine session
US11232872B2 (en) 2018-06-06 2022-01-25 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. Code trigger telemedicine session
US11125749B2 (en) 2018-06-06 2021-09-21 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for remote colorimetry and ratiometric comparison and quantification in analysis of medical test results
US11112406B2 (en) 2018-06-15 2021-09-07 Reliant Immune Diagnostics, Inc. System and method for digital remote primary, secondary, and tertiary color calibration via smart device in analysis of medical test results
US11327071B2 (en) 2019-12-04 2022-05-10 Progenity, Inc. Assessment of preeclampsia using assays for free and dissociated placental growth factor
US11112403B2 (en) 2019-12-04 2021-09-07 Progenity, Inc. Assessment of preeclampsia using assays for free and dissociated placental growth factor

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7270970B2 (en) 2007-09-18
ES2201672T3 (en) 2004-03-16
AU2655999A (en) 1999-08-16
ATE241825T1 (en) 2003-06-15
JP3515520B2 (en) 2004-04-05
US20060008923A1 (en) 2006-01-12
EP1051687A1 (en) 2000-11-15
CA2319731C (en) 2006-04-11
HK1029849A1 (en) 2001-04-12
DE69908302D1 (en) 2003-07-03
EP1293926A2 (en) 2003-03-19
DE69908302T2 (en) 2004-02-19
EP1051687B1 (en) 2003-05-28
EP1293926A3 (en) 2004-08-11
WO1999039298A1 (en) 1999-08-05
WO1999039298A9 (en) 1999-10-21
CA2319731A1 (en) 1999-08-05
US6394952B1 (en) 2002-05-28
US6936476B1 (en) 2005-08-30
US6867051B1 (en) 2005-03-15
US20040241752A1 (en) 2004-12-02
JP2002502045A (en) 2002-01-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7270970B2 (en) Point of care diagnostic systems
US6267722B1 (en) Point of care diagnostic systems
US8647888B2 (en) Immunoassay test strip for use in a diagnostic system
US11468991B2 (en) System and method for machine learning application for providing medical test results using visual indicia
US20210396750A1 (en) System and method for digital remote primary, secondary, and tertiary color calibration via smart device in analysis of medical test results
US10835122B2 (en) System and method for image processing of medical test results using generalized curve field transform
US11915810B2 (en) System and method for transmitting prescription to pharmacy using self-diagnostic test and telemedicine
US11867635B2 (en) System and method for visual trigger to perform diagnostic test
US20180106789A1 (en) System and method for variable function mobile application for providing medical test results using visual indicia to determine medical test function type
US20220020505A1 (en) System and method for initiating telemedicine conference using self-diagnostic test
US20220051763A1 (en) System and method for correlating retail testing product to medical diagnostic code
US20180107790A1 (en) System and method for variable function mobile application for providing medical test results
US11579145B2 (en) System and method for image analysis of medical test results
Srinivasan et al. Point-of-care quantification of serum alpha-fetoprotein for screening birth defects in resource-limited settings: proof-of-concept study
WO2018089315A1 (en) System and method for image analysis of medical test results
JP7524064B2 (en) Methods and systems for biomarker analysis
Mehta Balaji Srinivasan1, PhD; Julia L Finkelstein1, MPH, SM, ScD; David Erickson2, PhD; Saurabh Mehta1, MBBS, ScD
WO2018112257A1 (en) System and method for handing diagnostic test results to telemedicine provider

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: ADEZA BIOMEDICAL CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ANDERSON, EMORY V.;NEMEC, EDWARD;LAPOINTE, JEROME P.;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:016847/0049;SIGNING DATES FROM 20040721 TO 20040929

AS Assignment

Owner name: CYTYC CORPORATION, MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:ADEZA BIOMEDICAL CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:019794/0600

Effective date: 20070402

AS Assignment

Owner name: GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS L.P., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:CYTYC CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:020018/0529

Effective date: 20071022

Owner name: GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS L.P.,CALIFORNIA

Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:CYTYC CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:020018/0529

Effective date: 20071022

AS Assignment

Owner name: GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS L.P., AS COLLATERAL

Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:CYTYC CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:021301/0879

Effective date: 20080717

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: R2 TECHNOLOGY, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: CYTYC PRENATAL PRODUCTS CORP., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: DIRECT RADIOGRAPHY CORP., DELAWARE

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: CYTYC SURGICAL PRODUCTS II LIMITED PARTNERSHIP, MA

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: SUROS SURGICAL SYSTEMS, INC., INDIANA

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: CYTYC SURGICAL PRODUCTS III, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: BIOLUCENT, LLC, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: CYTYC SURGICAL PRODUCTS LIMITED PARTNERSHIP, MASSA

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: THIRD WAVE TECHNOLOGIES, INC., WISCONSIN

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: HOLOGIC, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819

Owner name: CYTYC CORPORATION, MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: TERMINATION OF PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENTS AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTERESTS;ASSIGNOR:GOLDMAN SACHS CREDIT PARTNERS, L.P., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:024892/0001

Effective date: 20100819